1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures true
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
202 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3364 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3366 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3384 manual for information on how to use it.
3387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3391 \begin_layout Standard
3392 Each class has a default set of options.
3393 Here's a quick table describing them:
3396 \begin_layout Standard
3397 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3405 \begin_inset Tabular
3406 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3407 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3866 \begin_layout Standard
3867 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 You're probably also wondering what
3875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3879 \begin_inset space ~
3883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3887 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3888 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3893 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3898 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3908 headings, there are also
3916 headings, and so on.
3917 We will describe these headings fully in section
3918 \begin_inset space ~
3922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3924 reference "subsec:Headings"
3931 \begin_layout Subsection
3933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3935 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3940 \begin_inset Index idx
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_inset Index idx
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3962 \begin_layout Standard
3963 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3972 \begin_inset space ~
3980 \begin_inset space ~
3985 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3987 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3988 doesn't support special options you want to
3989 use for your document.
3990 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3991 -class and its options, you have to read
3995 \begin_layout Standard
3999 \begin_inset space ~
4006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset space ~
4017 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4018 You can choose between the following five options:
4021 \begin_layout Labeling
4022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 Use default page style of current class.
4030 \begin_layout Labeling
4031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4036 No page numbers or headings.
4039 \begin_layout Labeling
4040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4048 \begin_layout Labeling
4049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4055 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4056 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4057 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4060 \begin_layout Labeling
4061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4066 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4067 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4073 \begin_inset Index idx
4076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4078 -packages ! fancyhdr
4084 How they are defined is explained in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4100 \begin_inset space ~
4104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4106 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4113 \begin_layout Subsection
4114 Paper Size and Orientation
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 Document ! Paper size
4125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4127 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4134 \begin_layout Standard
4135 You can find the following options in the menu
4138 \begin_inset space ~
4145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4149 \begin_inset Index idx
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4161 \begin_layout Labeling
4162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4166 \begin_inset space ~
4171 What size paper to print on.
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4203 US letter, US legal, US executive
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Labeling
4220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4225 To choose whether to output as
4236 \begin_layout Labeling
4237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4241 \begin_inset space ~
4246 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4247 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4250 \begin_layout Subsection
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4254 name "subsec:Margins"
4259 \begin_inset Index idx
4262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 \begin_inset Index idx
4272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 Paper margins are set in the menu
4284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4288 \begin_inset Index idx
4291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4302 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4303 the paper format and the font size into account.
4306 \begin_layout Subsection
4310 \begin_layout Standard
4311 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4317 That includes the paragraph environments.
4318 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4319 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4320 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4322 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4331 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4333 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4334 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4335 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4338 \begin_layout Section
4339 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 Paragraph ! Indentation
4352 \begin_layout Subsection
4354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4356 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4365 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4368 \begin_layout Standard
4369 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4370 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4371 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4372 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4376 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4382 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4383 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4384 language than English.
4386 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4389 \begin_layout Standard
4390 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4391 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4392 into \SpecialChar LyX
4394 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4397 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4399 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4400 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4401 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4408 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4409 goes to produce a printable file.
4414 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4416 gives you the ability globally to change
4420 these pre-coded spacings.
4421 We will explain more later.
4424 \begin_layout Subsection
4425 Paragraph Separation
4426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4428 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4433 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4437 Paragraph ! Separation
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4453 \begin_inset space ~
4461 \begin_inset space ~
4468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4472 \begin_inset Index idx
4475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4484 \begin_layout Subsection
4488 \begin_layout Standard
4489 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4494 \begin_inset space ~
4499 dialog and toggle the
4502 \begin_inset space ~
4507 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4510 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4514 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4515 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4519 \begin_layout Standard
4520 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4521 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4524 \begin_layout Subsection
4526 \begin_inset Index idx
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4530 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4538 \begin_layout Standard
4541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4545 \begin_inset Index idx
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4561 \begin_inset space ~
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4571 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4582 -packages ! setspace
4587 installed to use this feature.
4592 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4596 \begin_inset space ~
4601 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4602 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4605 \begin_layout Section
4606 Paragraph Environments
4607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4609 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4618 Paragraph ! Environments
4624 \begin_inset Index idx
4627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4628 Paragraph environments|(
4636 \begin_layout Subsection
4640 \begin_layout Standard
4641 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4653 } \SpecialChar ldots
4663 \begin_inset Newline newline
4666 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4670 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4679 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4682 \begin_layout Standard
4683 A paragraph environment is simply a
4684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4691 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4692 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4693 scheme, labels, and so on.
4694 Additionally, you can
4695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4702 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4703 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4704 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4705 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4707 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4709 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4714 \begin_inset Graphics
4715 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4721 at the left end of the toolbar.
4723 will change the environment of the
4727 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4728 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4729 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4742 create a new paragraph using the
4746 paragraph environment.
4748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4755 because if you are in one of these environments:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4802 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4806 , rather than resetting it to
4811 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4812 \begin_inset space ~
4816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4818 reference "sec:Nesting"
4825 \begin_layout Subsection
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 The default paragraph environment is
4835 It creates a plain paragraph.
4837 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4838 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4839 this manual) are in the
4846 \begin_layout Standard
4847 You can nest a paragraph using the
4851 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4859 \begin_layout Subsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4875 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4884 for thanks or contact information.
4885 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4886 places all of this on a separate page
4887 along with today's date.
4888 For other types of documents, the title
4889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4896 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4902 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4916 Here's how you use them:
4919 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 Put the title of your document in the
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 Put the author name in the
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4937 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4943 Note that using this environment is optional.
4944 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4945 will automatically insert today's date.
4946 If you don't want a date, use the option
4948 Suppress default date on front page
4952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 \begin_inset space ~
4963 \begin_layout Standard
4964 You can use footnotes to insert
4965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4972 or contact information.
4975 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_inset Index idx
4980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4989 name "subsec:Headings"
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4999 takes care of the numbering for you.
5002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5004 \begin_inset Index idx
5007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5008 Section headings ! Numbered
5016 \begin_layout Standard
5017 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Standard
5065 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5066 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5067 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5071 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5072 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5073 You group the book into chapters.
5075 does a similar grouping:
5078 \begin_layout Itemize
5083 is divided into either
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Itemize
5142 \begin_layout Itemize
5154 \begin_layout Standard
5155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5163 Not all document types use the
5167 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5172 is the top-level heading.
5180 \begin_layout Standard
5185 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5186 labels it with its number,
5187 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5189 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5203 \begin_inset Index idx
5206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5216 The unnumbered section headings have a
5217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5224 at the end of their name.
5225 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5226 the table of contents, see section
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5241 Changing the Numbering
5242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5244 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5252 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5253 in the Table of Contents.
5254 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5256 Just as certain classes start with
5270 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5280 This is something you can change.
5283 \begin_layout Standard
5286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5290 \begin_inset Index idx
5293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5302 \begin_inset space ~
5306 \begin_inset space ~
5311 you will see two counters.
5316 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5317 numbers a section heading.
5318 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5323 Short Titles of Headings
5324 \begin_inset Index idx
5327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5328 Section headings ! Short titles
5334 \begin_inset Argument 1
5337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5346 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5353 \begin_layout Standard
5354 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5355 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5356 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5357 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5362 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5363 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5364 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5365 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5370 \begin_inset space ~
5376 This will insert a box labeled
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset space ~
5385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5388 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5389 This also works for captions inside floats.
5390 There can only be one short title per title.
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5402 The following information applies to all section headings:
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5406 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5409 \begin_layout Itemize
5410 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5418 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5421 \begin_layout Subsection
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5427 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5441 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5442 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5443 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5444 the text they contain.
5445 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5453 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5456 \begin_layout Standard
5457 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5466 when you start a new paragraph.
5467 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5471 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5472 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5473 have to change back to the
5477 environment yourself.
5480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5489 \begin_inset Index idx
5492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5503 time for the differences.
5512 are identical except for one difference:
5516 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5525 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's an example of the
5542 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5544 See – no indentation!
5548 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5549 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5550 the other paragraph.
5553 \begin_layout Standard
5554 Here's another example, this time in the
5561 \begin_layout Quotation
5567 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5568 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5569 the first line, then
5573 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5577 you were quoting other text.
5580 \begin_layout Quotation
5581 Here's a new paragraph.
5582 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5583 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 As the examples show,
5591 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5592 They should put quotes in the
5597 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5601 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5606 \begin_inset Index idx
5609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 \begin_inset Index idx
5619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 \begin_layout Standard
5640 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5646 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 Which I did not rehearse!
5653 It could be much worse.
5654 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5656 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5657 indented a bit more than the first.
5658 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5664 \begin_inset Newline newline
5667 And make things look fine
5668 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 arg "newline-insert newline"
5680 \begin_layout Standard
5685 does not indent both margins.
5686 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5687 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5690 arg "newline-insert newline"
5696 \begin_layout Subsection
5698 \begin_inset Index idx
5701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5717 \begin_layout Standard
5719 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5729 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5730 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5739 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5740 lets you provide your own label.
5741 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5742 describing some general features of all four of them.
5745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5752 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5753 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5762 reset the environment to
5766 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5767 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5768 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5776 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5784 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5785 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5786 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5788 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5789 you read all of section
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5796 reference "sec:Nesting"
5803 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5805 \begin_inset Index idx
5808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5824 \begin_layout Standard
5825 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5829 paragraph environment.
5830 It has the following properties:
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5838 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5843 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 The items can have any length.
5851 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5852 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5864 environment inside another
5868 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5872 \begin_layout Itemize
5873 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5876 \begin_layout Itemize
5878 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5881 \begin_layout Itemize
5883 \begin_inset space ~
5887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5889 reference "sec:Nesting"
5893 for a full explanation of nesting.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5907 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5912 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 The label for the first level
5920 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 The label for the second level is a dash.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5939 \begin_layout Itemize
5940 Back out to the third level.
5944 \begin_layout Itemize
5945 Back to the second level.
5949 \begin_layout Itemize
5950 Back to the outermost level.
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 These are the default labels for an
5959 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5964 dialog in the submenu
5969 \begin_inset Index idx
5972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5983 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5984 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5986 \begin_inset space ~
5990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5992 reference "sec:Nesting"
5999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6001 \begin_inset Index idx
6004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Enumerate"
6020 \begin_layout Standard
6025 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6026 It has these properties:
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6030 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6034 \begin_layout Enumerate
6035 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6039 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6044 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 environment resets the counter to one.
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6067 Items can have any length.
6070 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6074 \begin_layout Enumerate
6075 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6083 \begin_layout Standard
6092 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6094 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6095 labels the four different levels in an
6102 \begin_layout Enumerate
6103 The first level of an
6107 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6125 \begin_layout Enumerate
6126 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Back to the third level
6136 \begin_layout Enumerate
6137 Back to the second level.
6141 \begin_layout Enumerate
6142 Back to the outermost level.
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6150 environment, see section
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6157 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6162 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 There is more to nesting
6171 environments than we've stated here.
6172 You should read section
6173 \begin_inset space ~
6177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6179 reference "sec:Nesting"
6183 to learn more about nesting.
6186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6188 \begin_inset Index idx
6191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6201 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6205 list has no fixed label.
6206 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6215 of the first line as the label.
6219 \begin_layout Description
6220 Example: This is an example of the
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6229 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 it is meant that the first usage of the
6246 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6248 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6256 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6276 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6280 for more information.) Here is an example:
6283 \begin_layout Description
6285 \begin_inset space ~
6288 Example: This one shows how to use a
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_layout Description
6304 Usage: You should use the
6308 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6309 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6311 It's not a good idea to use a
6315 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6316 You're better off using
6328 paragraphs into them.
6331 \begin_layout Description
6332 Nesting: You can nest
6336 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6340 \begin_layout Standard
6341 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6342 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6343 them from the first line.
6346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6348 \begin_inset Index idx
6351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6360 \begin_layout Standard
6365 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6366 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6379 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6381 Here are its properties:
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 \begin_inset space ~
6390 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6399 of each line as the item label.
6404 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6405 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6406 space as described above.
6409 \begin_layout Labeling
6410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6411 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6412 uses different margins for the item label and the
6413 body of the item text.
6414 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6415 label width plus a little extra space.
6419 \begin_layout Labeling
6420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6425 width \SpecialChar LyX
6426 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6427 If the label width is larger, the label
6428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6435 into the first line.
6436 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6437 margin of the rest of the item text.
6440 \begin_layout Labeling
6441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6443 \begin_inset space ~
6446 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6451 environment has the same left margin.
6452 \begin_inset Newline newline
6455 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 dialog (toolbar button
6468 arg "layout-paragraph"
6475 \begin_inset space ~
6480 determines the default label width.
6481 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6490 multiple times instead.
6491 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6509 every time you alter a label in a
6514 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 The predefined default width is the length of
6518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6526 \begin_inset space ~
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6537 list the same way as the
6541 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6547 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6551 \begin_layout Standard
6556 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6557 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6559 \begin_inset space ~
6563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6565 reference "sec:Nesting"
6569 to learn about nesting.
6572 \begin_layout Standard
6573 There is yet another feature of the
6577 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6578 left-justifies the item labels by
6580 You can use additional
6584 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6585 justifies the item label.
6590 are documented in section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6602 Here are some examples:
6605 \begin_layout Labeling
6606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6607 Left The default for
6614 \begin_layout Labeling
6615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6623 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6626 \begin_layout Labeling
6627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6628 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6632 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6642 \begin_layout Subsection
6644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6646 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Standard
6664 The features described in this section require that the module
6666 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6668 is loaded in the document settings.
6669 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6680 -packages ! enumitem
6688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6689 Custom Enumerate Lists
6690 \begin_inset Index idx
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6702 \begin_layout Standard
6704 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6710 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6711 There you add the command
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6736 Code, look at section
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6743 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6756 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6763 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6764 For capital Roman numerals replace
6776 in the command above.
6777 For Arabic numerals use
6785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6792 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6809 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 You can only number 26
6818 \begin_inset space ~
6821 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6830 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6831 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6834 \begin_layout Standard
6835 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6838 \begin_layout Enumerate
6839 \begin_inset Argument 1
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6868 \begin_layout Enumerate
6869 \begin_inset Argument 1
6872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6895 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6928 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_inset Argument 1
6932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6959 For this list these commands were used:
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6973 \begin_inset Newline newline
6981 \begin_inset Newline newline
6989 \begin_inset Newline newline
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7006 makes the label emphasized and
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7025 lists until you change the definition.
7033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7035 \begin_inset Index idx
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 \begin_inset Argument 1
7055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_inset Note Note
7077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 goes back to default numbering
7086 \begin_layout Enumerate
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7104 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7105 to indicate that it is a resumed
7106 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7107 , but in the output.
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7119 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7129 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7131 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7132 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7133 of a normal enumeration.
7134 There, insert the command
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7148 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7156 \begin_layout Enumerate
7160 \begin_layout Standard
7161 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7164 \begin_layout Enumerate
7165 \begin_inset Argument 1
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 This enumeration starts at 4
7187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7189 \begin_inset Index idx
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7204 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7207 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 with standard spacing
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7216 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7218 Add there the command
7222 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7225 \begin_layout Itemize
7226 \begin_inset Argument 1
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7248 \begin_layout Itemize
7252 \begin_layout Itemize
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7264 \begin_inset Index idx
7267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7269 -packages ! enumitem
7275 For more information see its documentation,
7276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7289 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7290 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7294 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7297 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 \begin_inset Argument 1
7301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7309 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7322 \begin_layout Enumerate
7323 with negative indentation
7326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7327 Further Customization
7328 \begin_inset Index idx
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 Lists ! Customization
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 You can also change the style of description lists.
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 changes the description label font, the command
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 sets the list style.
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 An example where the command
7369 \begin_layout Standard
7374 itshape, style=nextline
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_layout Description
7383 \begin_inset space ~
7387 \begin_inset Argument 1
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7398 itshape, style=nextline
7408 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7409 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7413 \begin_layout Description
7415 \begin_inset space ~
7418 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7419 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7420 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7430 \begin_inset Index idx
7433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7435 -packages ! enumitem
7441 For more information see its documentation
7442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7452 \begin_layout Subsection
7454 \begin_inset Index idx
7457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7468 \begin_inset space ~
7471 Address: An Overview
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7475 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7476 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7484 \begin_inset space ~
7490 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7491 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7492 gags on the document.
7493 In contrast, you can use the
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7506 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 Of course, you're not limited to using
7518 \begin_inset space ~
7527 \begin_inset space ~
7532 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7533 some European academic papers.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7540 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7552 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7553 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7562 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7563 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7564 Here's an example of each:
7567 \begin_layout Right Address
7569 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 \begin_inset Newline newline
7577 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 When is it? What is today?
7583 \begin_layout Standard
7587 \begin_inset space ~
7593 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7595 the largest block of text on a single line.
7596 Here's an example of the
7603 \begin_layout Address
7605 \begin_inset Newline newline
7608 Where do I send this
7609 \begin_inset Newline newline
7612 Your post office and country
7615 \begin_layout Standard
7616 As you can see, both
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7628 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7633 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7634 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7640 This makes sense, since
7648 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7649 Thus, you have to use
7656 arg "newline-insert newline"
7661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 \begin_inset space ~
7668 \begin_inset space ~
7673 ) to start a new line in an
7680 \begin_inset space ~
7688 \begin_layout Subsection
7692 \begin_layout Standard
7693 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7694 or list of references.
7696 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7701 \begin_inset Index idx
7704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Standard
7718 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7719 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7720 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7721 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7735 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7736 The book document classes ignores the
7740 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7744 in a letter document class.
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7752 environment does several things for you.
7753 First, it puts the centered label
7754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7762 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7764 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7765 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7766 the subsequent text.
7767 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7769 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 The new paragraph will still be in the
7784 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7785 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_inset Float figure
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset Graphics
7797 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7810 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 We would love to demonstrate the
7836 environment, but since this document is in the
7837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7844 class, we can't do this.
7845 We inserted it therefore as figure
7846 \begin_inset space ~
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7852 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7857 If you have never heard of an
7858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7865 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7870 \begin_inset Index idx
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7882 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7894 environment is used to list references.
7895 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7896 only use it at the end of the document.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 When you first open a
7913 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7914 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7930 depending on the document class.
7931 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7932 Each paragraph of the
7936 environment is a bibliography entry.
7941 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7942 Each new paragraph is still in the
7949 \begin_layout Standard
7950 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7951 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7953 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7955 handling, have a look at section
7956 \begin_inset space ~
7960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7962 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7969 \begin_layout Subsection
7970 Special Environments
7973 \begin_layout Standard
7975 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7976 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7997 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8010 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8012 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8017 key as a fixed whitespace.
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8039 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8057 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8060 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8063 arg "newline-insert newline"
8080 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8081 So, when you finish using the
8086 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8087 Also, you can nest the
8092 environment inside of others.
8095 \begin_layout Standard
8096 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8103 arg "newline-insert newline"
8106 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8111 \begin_inset space \space{}
8121 arg "newline-insert newline"
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 arg "newline-insert newline"
8141 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8147 \begin_layout Itemize
8148 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8149 You must put at least one
8153 in any line you want blank.
8154 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8163 since that will insert
8168 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8171 arg "self-insert \""
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8189 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8193 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 printf("Hello World!
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8211 \begin_layout Standard
8212 This is just the standard
8213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8230 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8232 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8233 as if you used a typewriter.
8234 \begin_inset Index idx
8237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8238 Paragraph environments|)
8243 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8246 Program Code Listings
8251 \begin_inset space ~
8259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8263 \begin_inset Index idx
8266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8280 environment is similar to the
8285 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8286 computer console text.
8291 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8305 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8306 you can have empty lines.
8319 \begin_layout Itemize
8320 have a certain language and a text style
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8325 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8326 and \SpecialChar TeX
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 Because of these properties
8335 works like a typewriter.
8339 \begin_layout Verbatim
8343 \begin_layout Verbatim
8346 The following 2 lines are empty:
8349 \begin_layout Verbatim
8353 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8363 \begin_layout Standard
8368 environment is identical to
8372 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8373 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8380 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8384 \begin_layout Section
8385 Nesting Environments
8386 \begin_inset Index idx
8389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8390 Nesting ! Environments
8396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8405 \begin_layout Subsection
8409 \begin_layout Standard
8411 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8413 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8415 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8417 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8429 \begin_layout Enumerate
8433 \begin_layout Enumerate
8438 \begin_layout Enumerate
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8447 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Standard
8452 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8453 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8457 \begin_inset space ~
8461 \begin_inset space ~
8469 \begin_inset space ~
8473 \begin_inset space ~
8478 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8480 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8483 arg "depth-increment"
8489 arg "depth-decrement"
8503 arg "depth-increment"
8509 arg "depth-decrement"
8513 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8514 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8518 \begin_layout Standard
8519 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8520 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8521 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8522 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8523 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8526 \begin_layout Standard
8527 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8529 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8531 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8534 \begin_layout Subsection
8535 What You Can and Can't Nest
8538 \begin_layout Standard
8539 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8540 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8543 \begin_layout Standard
8544 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8545 than a simple yes or no.
8546 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8549 \begin_layout Itemize
8550 Completely unnestable
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8558 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8563 \begin_layout Standard
8564 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8565 environments have them:
8568 \begin_layout Description
8569 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8570 Can't nest into them.
8574 \begin_layout Itemize
8580 \begin_layout Itemize
8586 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Itemize
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8605 \begin_layout Description
8607 \begin_inset space ~
8610 Nestable You can nest them.
8611 You can nest other things into them.
8615 \begin_layout Itemize
8621 \begin_layout Itemize
8627 \begin_layout Itemize
8633 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 \begin_layout Itemize
8645 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Itemize
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Itemize
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 \begin_layout Description
8678 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8679 You can't nest anything into them.
8683 \begin_layout Itemize
8689 \begin_layout Itemize
8695 \begin_layout Itemize
8701 \begin_layout Itemize
8707 \begin_layout Itemize
8713 \begin_layout Itemize
8719 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 \begin_layout Itemize
8731 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8743 \begin_layout Itemize
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_inset space ~
8771 \begin_layout Itemize
8778 \begin_layout Standard
8779 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8787 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8797 \begin_inset space ~
8800 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8801 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8802 nested section headings violate this.
8810 \begin_layout Subsection
8811 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8812 \begin_inset Index idx
8815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8816 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8824 \begin_layout Standard
8825 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8826 affected by nesting anyhow.
8830 \begin_layout Itemize
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8842 \begin_layout Standard
8844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8852 Figures and tables in
8856 are not affected by this.
8861 Have a look at section
8862 \begin_inset space ~
8866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8868 reference "sec:Floats"
8872 for more information about
8879 \begin_layout Standard
8881 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8882 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8886 \begin_layout Standard
8887 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8895 of its own, it behaves just like a
8896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8903 paragraph environment.
8904 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8908 \begin_layout Standard
8909 Here's an example with a table:
8912 \begin_layout Enumerate
8917 \begin_layout Enumerate
8918 This is (a) and it's nested.
8922 \begin_layout Standard
8923 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8929 \begin_layout Standard
8931 \begin_inset Tabular
8932 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8933 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8935 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9019 \begin_layout Standard
9020 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9027 \begin_layout Enumerate
9029 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9033 \begin_layout Enumerate
9037 \begin_layout Standard
9038 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9041 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 \begin_layout Enumerate
9047 This is (a) and it's nested.
9051 \begin_layout Standard
9052 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9058 \begin_layout Standard
9060 \begin_inset Tabular
9061 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9062 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9148 \begin_layout Standard
9149 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9155 \begin_layout Enumerate
9162 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9165 \begin_layout Enumerate
9169 \begin_layout Standard
9170 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9175 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9178 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9181 \begin_layout Enumerate
9186 \begin_layout Enumerate
9187 This is (a) and it's nested.
9190 \begin_layout Standard
9191 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9197 \begin_layout Standard
9199 \begin_inset Tabular
9200 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9201 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9288 \begin_layout Standard
9289 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9295 \begin_layout Enumerate
9297 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9304 \begin_layout Enumerate
9308 \begin_layout Standard
9309 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9315 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9316 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9320 \begin_layout Subsection
9321 Usage and General Features
9324 \begin_layout Standard
9325 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9326 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9335 is the innermost possible depth.
9336 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9339 \begin_layout Enumerate
9340 level #1 – outermost
9344 \begin_layout Enumerate
9349 \begin_layout Enumerate
9354 \begin_layout Enumerate
9359 \begin_layout Itemize
9364 \begin_layout Itemize
9373 \begin_layout Standard
9374 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9375 both of them in the example.
9376 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9386 For example, if we tried to nest another
9391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9398 , we would get errors.
9401 \begin_layout Subsection
9403 \begin_inset Index idx
9406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9415 \begin_layout Standard
9416 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9417 We have several examples of nested environments.
9418 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9423 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9426 \begin_layout Labeling
9427 \labelwidthstring MMM
9428 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9437 \begin_layout Labeling
9438 \labelwidthstring MMM
9439 #2-a This is level #2.
9440 We created it by using
9443 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9449 arg "depth-increment"
9456 \begin_layout Labeling
9457 \labelwidthstring MMM
9458 #3-a This is level #3.
9459 This time, we just enter
9466 arg "depth-increment"
9470 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9474 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9480 arg "depth-increment"
9487 \begin_layout Standard
9492 environment, nested inside of
9493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9501 So, it's at level #4.
9502 We did this by entering
9505 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9511 arg "depth-increment"
9514 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9519 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9535 \begin_layout Standard
9540 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9543 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9549 \begin_layout Labeling
9550 \labelwidthstring MMM
9551 #4-a This is level #4.
9555 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9558 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9563 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9567 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9572 keep nesting things inside
9573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9584 \begin_layout Labeling
9585 \labelwidthstring MMM
9586 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9591 \begin_layout Labeling
9592 \labelwidthstring MMM
9593 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9594 and this is level #6.
9595 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9599 \begin_layout Labeling
9600 \labelwidthstring MMM
9601 #5-b Back to level #5.
9605 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9611 arg "depth-decrement"
9618 \begin_layout Labeling
9619 \labelwidthstring MMM
9623 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9629 arg "depth-decrement"
9632 , we're back at level #4.
9636 \begin_layout Labeling
9637 \labelwidthstring MMM
9638 #3-b Back to level #3.
9639 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9643 \begin_layout Labeling
9644 \labelwidthstring MMM
9645 #2-b Back to level #2.
9650 \begin_layout Labeling
9651 \labelwidthstring MMM
9652 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9653 After this sentence, we will enter
9657 and change the paragraph environment back to
9664 \begin_layout Standard
9665 We could have also used the
9681 environment in place of the
9686 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9690 Example 2: Inheritance
9693 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9694 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9697 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9706 arg "depth-increment"
9710 \begin_inset Newline newline
9713 which, we will change to the
9721 \begin_layout Enumerate
9726 environment, at level #2.
9729 \begin_layout Enumerate
9730 Notice how the nested
9734 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9738 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9742 \begin_layout Standard
9743 We ended this example by entering
9748 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9752 and reset the nesting depth by using
9755 arg "depth-decrement"
9761 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9762 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9771 \begin_inset Argument 1
9774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9775 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9783 \begin_layout Enumerate
9784 This is level #1, in an
9788 paragraph environment.
9789 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9793 \begin_layout Enumerate
9798 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9804 arg "depth-increment"
9808 Now, what happens if we nest an
9812 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9813 label be? An asterisk?
9817 \begin_layout Itemize
9827 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9828 So, its label is a bullet.
9829 (We got here by using
9832 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9838 arg "depth-increment"
9841 , then changing the environment to
9849 \begin_layout Itemize
9850 Here's level #4, produced using
9853 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9859 arg "depth-increment"
9863 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9868 \begin_layout Enumerate
9871 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9876 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9880 , because we are in the
9888 environment (that is, it is an
9903 \begin_layout Enumerate
9908 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9909 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9913 \begin_layout Enumerate
9914 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9917 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9920 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9923 \begin_layout Enumerate
9927 arg "depth-decrement"
9930 to decrease the depth after the next
9933 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9940 \begin_layout Enumerate
9942 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9947 \begin_layout Enumerate
9949 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9950 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9954 \begin_layout Enumerate
9955 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9964 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9969 reset the counter for the label.
9973 \begin_layout Enumerate
9977 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9983 arg "depth-decrement"
9986 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9987 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9988 into the twofold-nested
9996 \begin_layout Enumerate
9997 The same thing happens if we do another
10000 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10006 arg "depth-decrement"
10009 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10012 \begin_layout Standard
10013 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10018 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10029 The number of other
10033 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10040 The same rule applies for the
10044 environment, as well.
10047 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10048 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10051 \begin_layout Enumerate
10052 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10053 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10054 the same detail with how we did it.
10063 \begin_layout Standard
10071 arg "depth-increment"
10078 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10079 the example in parentheses someplace.
10080 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10081 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10082 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10086 \begin_layout Enumerate
10091 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10095 \begin_layout Verse
10096 Now we will add verse.
10097 \begin_inset Newline newline
10100 It will get much worse.
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10111 arg "depth-increment"
10121 \begin_layout Verse
10122 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10123 \begin_inset Newline newline
10126 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10133 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10141 \begin_layout Verse
10142 Here comes a table:
10146 \begin_layout Standard
10147 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10153 \begin_layout Standard
10155 \begin_inset Tabular
10156 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10157 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10244 \begin_layout Verse
10248 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10258 arg "depth-increment"
10264 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10270 \begin_inset Newline newline
10278 arg "depth-decrement"
10285 \begin_layout Enumerate
10290 : level #1) This is another item.
10291 Note that selecting a
10295 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10296 3 times to put the table inside the
10304 \begin_layout Quotation
10305 We're now ending the
10309 list and changing to
10314 We're still at level #1.
10315 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10316 The next set of paragraphs is a
10317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10324 We will nest both the
10331 \begin_inset space ~
10336 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10340 for the letter body.
10344 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10347 to preserve the depth.
10348 Remember that you need to use
10351 arg "newline-insert newline"
10354 to create multiple lines inside the
10361 \begin_inset space ~
10371 \begin_layout Right Address
10373 \begin_inset Newline newline
10376 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10377 \begin_inset Newline newline
10383 \begin_layout Address
10385 \begin_inset space ~
10391 \begin_layout Quotation
10392 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10396 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10397 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10398 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10399 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10400 as soon as possible.
10401 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10404 \begin_layout Quotation
10405 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10406 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10407 with your order, along with payment.
10410 \begin_layout Quotation
10411 We thank you again for your patience.
10414 \begin_layout Address
10416 \begin_inset Newline newline
10423 \begin_layout Quotation
10424 That ends that example!
10427 \begin_layout Standard
10428 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10429 gives you a lot of power with just
10431 We could have easily nested an
10452 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10455 \begin_layout Subsection
10457 \begin_inset Index idx
10460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10461 Nesting ! Separation
10467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10469 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10476 \begin_layout Standard
10477 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10479 For example you need two different enumerations:
10482 \begin_layout Enumerate
10487 \begin_layout Enumerate
10492 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Standard
10497 \begin_inset Separator plain
10503 \begin_layout Itemize
10509 \begin_layout Standard
10510 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10516 \begin_layout Enumerate
10520 \begin_layout Enumerate
10524 \begin_layout Enumerate
10528 \begin_layout Standard
10529 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10530 list item and use the menu
10532 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10533 Start New Environment
10536 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10537 ) and behind it the new list.
10540 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10541 Start New Parent Environment
10543 only appears if the item is nested.
10544 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10548 \begin_layout Standard
10549 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10550 (red arrow in LyX).
10551 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10552 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10555 \begin_layout Standard
10556 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10559 arg "paragraph-break"
10566 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10569 \begin_layout Section
10570 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10571 \begin_inset Index idx
10574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10583 \begin_layout Standard
10584 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10585 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10587 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10588 be broken at the end of a line.
10589 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10593 \begin_layout Subsection
10595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10597 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10602 \begin_inset Index idx
10605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10614 \begin_layout Standard
10615 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10616 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10617 ) not to break the line at
10619 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10622 \begin_layout Quote
10623 Further documentation is given in section
10624 \begin_inset Newline newline
10628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10630 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10638 \begin_layout Standard
10639 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10654 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10663 A protected space is set with
10665 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10666 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10668 \begin_inset space ~
10676 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10682 \begin_layout Subsection
10684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10686 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10691 \begin_inset Index idx
10694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10695 Spacing ! Horizontal
10703 \begin_layout Standard
10704 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10707 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10711 The length units are listed in Appendix
10712 \begin_inset space ~
10716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10718 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10729 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10734 \begin_inset Index idx
10737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10738 Spaces ! Inter-word
10746 \begin_layout Standard
10747 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10748 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10749 at the ends of sentences.
10750 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10751 automatically takes care about this.
10752 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10753 followed by a period; see section
10754 \begin_inset space ~
10758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10760 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10765 To insert a normal space, select
10767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10770 \begin_inset space ~
10778 arg "space-insert normal"
10784 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10788 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10793 \begin_inset Index idx
10796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10805 \begin_layout Standard
10807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10814 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10823 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10824 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10825 inside abbreviations:
10828 \begin_layout Quote
10830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10834 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10837 \begin_layout Standard
10838 or between values and units.
10839 Compare for example this:
10840 \begin_inset Newline newline
10844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10848 \begin_inset Newline newline
10851 10 kg (normal space
10854 \begin_layout Standard
10855 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10858 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10860 \begin_inset space ~
10868 arg "space-insert thin"
10874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10878 \begin_layout Standard
10879 You can also insert the following space types:
10882 \begin_layout Description
10884 \begin_inset space ~
10888 \begin_inset space ~
10891 space A line with a
10892 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10896 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10900 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10903 negative thin space between the arrows.
10906 \begin_layout Description
10908 \begin_inset space ~
10912 \begin_inset space ~
10915 space A line with a
10916 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10920 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10924 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10927 negative medium space between the arrows.
10930 \begin_layout Description
10932 \begin_inset space ~
10936 \begin_inset space ~
10939 space A line with a
10940 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10944 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10948 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10951 negative thick space between the arrows.
10954 \begin_layout Description
10956 \begin_inset space ~
10960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10964 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10968 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10972 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10976 \begin_inset space ~
10980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 em) space between the arrows.
10986 \begin_layout Description
10988 \begin_inset space ~
10992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10996 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11000 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11004 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11008 \begin_inset space ~
11012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 em) space between the arrows.
11018 \begin_layout Description
11020 \begin_inset space ~
11024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11028 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11032 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11036 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11040 \begin_inset space ~
11044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11047 em) space between the arrows.
11050 \begin_layout Description
11052 \begin_inset space ~
11056 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11060 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11065 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11072 cm space between the arrows.
11075 \begin_layout Standard
11077 \begin_inset space ~
11081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11083 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11087 lists the different space sizes.
11090 \begin_layout Standard
11091 \begin_inset Float table
11096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11097 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11102 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11106 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11116 \begin_inset Tabular
11117 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11118 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11120 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11236 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11395 \begin_inset Index idx
11398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11407 \begin_layout Standard
11408 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11409 feature for adding extra space
11410 in a uniform fashion.
11411 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11412 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11413 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11414 equally between themselves.
11417 \begin_layout Standard
11418 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11421 \begin_layout Quote
11423 This is on the left side
11424 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11427 This is on the right
11430 \begin_layout Quote
11433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11443 \begin_layout Quote
11446 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11450 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11454 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11460 \begin_layout Standard
11461 That was an example in the
11467 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11471 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11475 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11478 is one in a standard paragraph.
11479 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11483 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11486 \begin_layout Standard
11487 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11490 \begin_inset space ~
11495 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11500 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11504 \begin_inset space ~
11510 \begin_layout Standard
11512 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11516 \begin_inset space ~
11522 \begin_layout Standard
11524 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11528 \begin_inset space ~
11534 \begin_layout Standard
11536 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11540 \begin_inset space ~
11546 \begin_layout Standard
11548 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11552 \begin_inset space ~
11558 \begin_layout Standard
11560 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11564 \begin_inset space ~
11570 \begin_layout Standard
11571 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11579 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11583 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11585 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11586 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11590 option in the space dialog.
11598 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11602 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11607 \begin_inset Index idx
11610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11619 \begin_layout Standard
11620 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11621 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11624 \begin_layout Standard
11625 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11628 What is correct English?:
11629 \begin_inset Newline newline
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset space ~
11640 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11641 \begin_inset Newline newline
11645 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11656 \begin_inset Newline newline
11660 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11671 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11677 \begin_layout Standard
11679 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11684 \begin_inset space ~
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11696 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11699 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11703 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11709 \begin_inset space ~
11713 \begin_inset space ~
11717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11720 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11729 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11730 That is why it is named
11731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11739 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11740 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11744 \begin_layout Subsection
11746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11748 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11753 \begin_inset Index idx
11756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11765 \begin_layout Standard
11766 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11769 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11771 \begin_inset space ~
11777 There you find the following sizes:
11780 \begin_layout Standard
11793 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11794 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11799 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11801 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11802 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11804 \begin_inset space ~
11810 \begin_inset Index idx
11813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11814 Document ! Settings
11819 for the paragraph separation.
11820 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11831 \begin_layout Standard
11837 \begin_inset Index idx
11840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11846 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11847 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11852 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11853 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11862 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11871 s are described in section
11872 \begin_inset space ~
11876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11878 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11887 If there are several
11891 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11892 You can therefore use
11896 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11899 \begin_layout Standard
11904 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11905 \begin_inset space ~
11909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11911 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11918 \begin_layout Standard
11919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11929 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11930 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11942 \begin_layout Subsection
11943 Paragraph Alignment
11944 \begin_inset Index idx
11947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11948 Paragraph ! Alignment
11956 \begin_layout Standard
11957 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11962 dialog (toolbar button
11965 arg "layout-paragraph"
11969 There are five possibilities:
11972 \begin_layout Itemize
11980 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11986 \begin_layout Itemize
11994 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12000 \begin_layout Itemize
12008 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12014 \begin_layout Itemize
12022 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12028 \begin_layout Itemize
12036 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12042 \begin_layout Standard
12043 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12044 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12045 the left and right margins.
12046 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12049 \begin_layout Standard
12051 This paragraph is right aligned,
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12056 this one is centered,
12059 \begin_layout Standard
12061 this one is left aligned.
12064 \begin_layout Subsection
12066 \begin_inset Index idx
12069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12070 Page breaks ! Forced
12076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12078 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12086 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12087 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12088 force a page break where you want one.
12089 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12090 is good at page breaking.
12091 Only if you use a lot of
12095 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12096 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12099 \begin_layout Standard
12100 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12101 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12105 have to change the page breaking.
12108 \begin_layout Standard
12109 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12111 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12114 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12116 \begin_inset space ~
12122 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12125 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12127 \begin_inset space ~
12132 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12134 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12135 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12138 \begin_layout Standard
12139 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12140 at the top of a page.
12141 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12143 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12144 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12145 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12149 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12153 to learn more about
12160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12164 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12169 \begin_inset Index idx
12172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12173 Page breaks ! Clear
12181 \begin_layout Standard
12182 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12183 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12184 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12185 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12186 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12189 \begin_layout Standard
12190 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12195 \begin_inset space ~
12201 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12204 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12206 \begin_inset space ~
12210 \begin_inset space ~
12215 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12216 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12219 \begin_layout Subsection
12221 \begin_inset Index idx
12224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12233 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12240 \begin_layout Standard
12241 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12243 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12248 \begin_inset space ~
12252 \begin_inset space ~
12260 arg "newline-insert newline"
12264 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12267 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12269 \begin_inset space ~
12273 \begin_inset space ~
12281 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12284 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12286 This is useful to avoid
12287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12294 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12297 \begin_layout Standard
12298 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12299 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12301 very good at line breaking.
12302 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12303 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12304 \begin_inset space ~
12308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12310 reference "sec:Quote"
12315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12317 reference "sec:Verse"
12322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12324 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12331 \begin_layout Subsection
12333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12335 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12340 \begin_inset Index idx
12343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12354 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12365 \begin_layout Standard
12369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12370 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12372 \begin_inset space ~
12377 you can insert horizontal lines.
12378 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12379 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12380 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12383 \begin_layout Standard
12385 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12396 \begin_layout Section
12397 Characters and Symbols
12400 \begin_layout Standard
12401 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12402 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12403 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12411 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12415 for information on how this is done.
12418 \begin_layout Standard
12419 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12424 dialog via the menu
12426 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12427 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12433 \begin_layout Standard
12434 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12442 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12443 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12445 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12453 \begin_layout Section
12454 Fonts and Text Styles
12455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12457 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12464 \begin_layout Subsection
12466 \begin_inset Index idx
12469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12478 \begin_layout Standard
12479 There are two types of fonts:
12482 \begin_layout Description
12484 \begin_inset space ~
12488 \begin_inset Index idx
12491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12497 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12502 characters) in the font.
12503 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12504 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12505 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12506 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12507 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12508 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12509 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12510 \begin_inset Newline newline
12513 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12514 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12515 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12516 sizes than at small ones.
12517 \begin_inset Newline newline
12531 \begin_inset space ~
12539 \begin_layout Description
12541 \begin_inset space ~
12545 \begin_inset Index idx
12548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12554 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12555 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12556 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12557 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12558 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12559 image manipulation program.
12560 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12561 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12562 \begin_inset space ~
12565 pixels high up to 34
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12569 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12570 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12571 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12573 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12574 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12575 \begin_inset Newline newline
12578 Bitmap fonts are named
12581 \begin_inset space ~
12586 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12589 \begin_layout Standard
12590 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12591 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12592 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12593 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12594 use scalable fonts.
12597 \begin_layout Standard
12598 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12601 \begin_layout Standard
12602 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12603 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12604 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12605 font to emphasize text, you use an
12606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12614 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12616 In \SpecialChar LyX
12617 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12621 \begin_layout Subsection
12624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12626 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12633 \begin_layout Standard
12634 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12635 used its own fonts.
12636 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12637 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12641 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12642 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12643 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12644 to a word processor.
12645 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12646 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12647 files are very portable across
12648 different machines.
12649 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 has increased a lot
12651 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12654 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12656 \begin_inset space ~
12660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12662 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12667 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12668 code in the document
12669 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12672 \begin_layout Standard
12673 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12674 engines that are also able directly
12675 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12677 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12679 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12681 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12682 that is installed on your system.
12683 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12686 \begin_layout Standard
12687 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12695 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12696 es; so you might have to experiment.
12704 \begin_layout Subsection
12705 Document Font and Font size
12706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12708 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12713 \begin_inset Index idx
12716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 \begin_inset Index idx
12726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12735 \begin_layout Standard
12736 You can set the document fonts in the
12738 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12742 \begin_inset Index idx
12745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12746 Document ! Settings
12756 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12757 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12760 \begin_inset space ~
12769 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12771 \begin_inset space ~
12774 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12777 \begin_layout Standard
12782 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12783 This requires that you use
12795 as the output format, i.
12796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12800 \begin_inset space \space{}
12803 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12804 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12805 installed (see section
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12812 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12817 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12819 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12820 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12822 \begin_inset space ~
12825 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12826 cannot determine the family.
12827 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12828 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12831 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12834 \begin_layout Standard
12835 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12836 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12841 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12847 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12848 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12856 \begin_inset space ~
12862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12875 European Computer Modern
12878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12885 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12888 \begin_layout Standard
12897 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12898 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12903 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12906 \begin_inset space ~
12911 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12917 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12918 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12921 \begin_layout Itemize
12925 \begin_inset space ~
12930 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12943 \begin_inset space ~
12948 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12949 community in order to replace
12953 as the default font.
12954 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12955 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12958 \begin_inset space ~
12971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12972 One difference is improved kerning.
12980 \begin_layout Itemize
12984 \begin_inset space ~
12988 \begin_inset space ~
12993 fonts in (the rare) case that
12996 \begin_inset space ~
13001 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13016 Virtual means that it
13017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13028 -glyphs from other fonts.
13029 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13051 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13057 \begin_inset Index idx
13060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13062 -packages ! aeguill
13067 with the document preamble line
13068 \begin_inset Newline newline
13075 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13076 \begin_inset Newline newline
13081 will fix the guillemet problem.
13086 and that accented characters are not
13090 glyph, but built of
13094 characters, the accent and the letter.
13095 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13101 If you search for example for the French word
13102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13109 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13118 and not for the glyph
13119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13123 \begin_inset space ~
13127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13133 \begin_layout Itemize
13134 If you do not like the look of
13142 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13153 \begin_inset space ~
13163 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13164 \begin_inset space ~
13167 serif and typewriter fonts,
13171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13172 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13179 \begin_inset space ~
13188 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13193 \begin_inset space \space{}
13201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13205 \begin_inset space \space{}
13211 \begin_inset space ~
13219 \begin_inset space ~
13229 but you can also select your own.
13230 \begin_inset Newline newline
13233 The differences between roman,
13236 \begin_inset space ~
13245 fonts are explained in section
13246 \begin_inset space ~
13250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13252 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13257 \begin_inset Newline newline
13263 \begin_inset space ~
13268 was originally designed for newspapers.
13269 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13270 into the small newspaper columns.
13274 \begin_inset space ~
13279 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13282 \begin_layout Standard
13283 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13296 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13301 depends on the class you are using.
13302 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13305 \begin_layout Standard
13306 Note that the font size is the
13311 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13312 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13313 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13314 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13317 \begin_inset space ~
13323 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13324 \begin_inset space ~
13328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13330 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13337 \begin_layout Standard
13341 \begin_inset space ~
13346 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13348 \begin_inset space ~
13351 serif or typewriter.
13356 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13366 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13369 \begin_layout Standard
13374 LaTeX font encoding
13376 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13377 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13383 \begin_inset Index idx
13386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13388 -packages ! fontenc
13394 \begin_inset space ~
13398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13400 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13405 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13406 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13413 \begin_layout Standard
13414 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13416 Use Old Style Figures
13420 Use True Small Caps
13423 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13426 Use Old Style Figures
13428 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13430 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13438 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13442 Use True Small Caps
13444 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13445 of scaled capitals.
13446 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13447 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13450 \begin_layout Standard
13455 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13456 a font to display the script characters.
13460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13461 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13467 \begin_inset Index idx
13470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13477 So this has no effect for the document language
13491 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13495 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13503 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13508 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13509 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13511 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13513 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13516 dialog, see section
13517 \begin_inset space ~
13521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13523 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13535 \begin_layout Subsection
13539 \begin_layout Standard
13540 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13541 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13543 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13544 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13545 choose a math font in the dialog
13547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13551 \begin_inset Index idx
13554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13555 Document ! Settings
13561 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13562 automatically selects a math font.
13563 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13564 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13573 \begin_inset space ~
13579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13584 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13585 document font is available.
13588 \begin_layout Standard
13589 Note that the math font will not be used for
13593 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13599 or by the insertion of the command
13606 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13607 \begin_inset space ~
13611 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13612 while the math characters do not.
13614 \begin_inset space ~
13617 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13620 \begin_inset space ~
13628 \begin_inset space ~
13633 in the document font settings.
13636 \begin_layout Standard
13637 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13638 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13639 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13640 font (in most cases
13641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13647 \begin_inset space ~
13653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13656 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13657 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13665 \begin_inset space ~
13671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13677 \begin_layout Subsection
13678 Using Different Character Styles
13679 \begin_inset Index idx
13682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13689 \begin_inset Index idx
13692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13701 \begin_layout Standard
13702 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13703 automatically changes the character style for certain
13704 paragraph environments.
13706 supports two character styles,
13715 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13719 \begin_layout Standard
13724 style, do one of the following:
13727 \begin_layout Itemize
13728 click on the toolbar button
13737 \begin_layout Itemize
13738 use the key binding
13747 \begin_layout Standard
13748 These commands are all toggles.
13753 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13756 \begin_layout Standard
13757 One typically uses the
13761 style for proper names.
13763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13770 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13778 \begin_layout Standard
13779 A more widely used character style is the
13784 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13791 \begin_layout Itemize
13792 clicking on the toolbar button
13801 \begin_layout Itemize
13802 using the keybindings
13811 \begin_layout Standard
13816 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13818 use a different font.
13821 \begin_layout Standard
13822 We've been using the
13826 style all over the place in this document.
13827 Here's one more example:
13830 \begin_layout Quotation
13833 Do not overuse character styles!
13836 \begin_layout Standard
13837 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13838 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13839 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13840 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13844 \begin_layout Standard
13845 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13853 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13855 \begin_inset space ~
13858 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13864 arg "dialog-show character"
13870 \begin_layout Subsection
13871 Fine-Tuning with the
13876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13878 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13883 \begin_inset Index idx
13886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13895 \begin_layout Standard
13896 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13898 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13899 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13900 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13901 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13902 from ordinary dialog.
13905 \begin_layout Standard
13906 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13907 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13908 \begin_inset Newline newline
13911 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13912 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13915 \begin_layout Standard
13916 To use custom character styles, open the
13918 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13920 \begin_inset space ~
13923 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13926 dialog or press the toolbar button
13929 arg "dialog-show character"
13933 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13934 font property that you can choose.
13935 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13938 \begin_inset space ~
13943 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13948 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13949 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13950 environments all at once.
13953 \begin_layout Standard
13954 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13957 \begin_inset space ~
13969 \begin_layout Labeling
13970 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13984 The possible options are:
13988 \begin_layout Labeling
13989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13994 This is the Roman font family.
13995 Normally a serif font.
13996 It's also the default family.
14006 \begin_layout Labeling
14007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14011 \begin_inset space ~
14018 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14030 \begin_layout Labeling
14031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14038 This is the Typewriter font family.
14044 arg "font-typewriter"
14053 \begin_layout Labeling
14054 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14059 This corresponds to the print weight.
14064 \begin_layout Labeling
14065 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14070 This is the Medium font series.
14071 It's also the default series.
14074 \begin_layout Labeling
14075 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14082 This is the Bold font series.
14095 \begin_layout Labeling
14096 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14101 As the name implies.
14106 \begin_layout Labeling
14107 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14112 This is the Upright font shape.
14113 It's also the default shape.
14116 \begin_layout Labeling
14117 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14131 s the Italic font shape
14137 \begin_layout Labeling
14138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14145 This is the Slanted font shape
14147 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14148 , this is different from italic).
14151 \begin_layout Labeling
14152 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14156 \begin_inset space ~
14163 This is the Small caps font shape
14170 \begin_layout Labeling
14171 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14176 Alters the text color.
14177 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14181 \begin_inset space ~
14186 , which means that the document default color set in
14188 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14189 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14195 \begin_inset space ~
14200 is used, you can choose between
14277 \begin_inset Index idx
14280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14289 \begin_layout Labeling
14290 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14295 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14296 the language of the document.
14297 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14298 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14300 \begin_inset Newline newline
14303 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14305 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14306 When using the spell checking (see section
14307 \begin_inset space ~
14311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14313 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14317 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14320 \begin_layout Labeling
14321 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14326 Alters the size of the font.
14327 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14328 proportional to the document font size.
14329 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14330 the details, but a general description of what
14336 \begin_layout Labeling
14337 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14358 arg "font-size tiny"
14364 \begin_layout Labeling
14365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14386 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14392 \begin_layout Labeling
14393 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14414 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14420 \begin_layout Labeling
14421 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14442 arg "font-size small"
14448 \begin_layout Labeling
14449 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14463 It's also the default size.
14467 arg "font-size normal"
14473 \begin_layout Labeling
14474 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14495 arg "font-size large"
14501 \begin_layout Labeling
14502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14523 arg "font-size larger"
14529 \begin_layout Labeling
14530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14551 arg "font-size largest"
14557 \begin_layout Labeling
14558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14579 arg "font-size huge"
14585 \begin_layout Labeling
14586 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14607 arg "font-size giant"
14613 \begin_layout Labeling
14614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14619 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14639 arg "font-size increase"
14645 \begin_layout Labeling
14646 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14651 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14671 arg "font-size decrease"
14678 \begin_layout Standard
14683 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14684 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14686 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14687 — use those instead.
14688 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14691 \begin_layout Labeling
14692 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14697 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14702 \begin_layout Labeling
14703 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14710 This is text with emphasize on
14713 This might seem like the same as
14717 , but it is actually a bit different.
14723 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14725 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14728 \begin_layout Labeling
14729 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14736 This is text with Underbar on.
14742 arg "font-underline"
14748 \begin_inset Newline newline
14753 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14754 when you could not change fonts.
14755 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14756 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14757 because some people
14761 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14764 \begin_layout Labeling
14765 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14769 \begin_inset space ~
14776 This is text with Double underbar on.
14782 arg "font-underunderline"
14786 \begin_inset Newline newline
14789 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14790 about double underbar.
14793 \begin_layout Labeling
14794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14798 \begin_inset space ~
14805 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14811 arg "font-underwave"
14815 \begin_inset Newline newline
14818 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14819 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14822 \begin_layout Labeling
14823 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14830 This is text with Strikeout on.
14836 arg "font-strikeout"
14840 \begin_inset Newline newline
14843 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14844 changed in the meantime.
14847 \begin_layout Labeling
14848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14855 This is text with Noun on.
14862 , this is a logical attribute.
14863 Normally it's equivalent to
14866 \begin_inset space ~
14875 \begin_layout Standard
14876 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14877 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14879 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14881 \begin_inset space ~
14884 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14890 arg "dialog-show character"
14893 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14894 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14897 arg "textstyle-apply"
14901 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14905 \begin_layout Standard
14906 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14913 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14914 (suppose you just set the shape to
14915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14933 \begin_inset space ~
14945 \begin_layout Standard
14946 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14954 \begin_inset space ~
14966 \begin_layout Itemize
14972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14979 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14997 \begin_inset Newline newline
15001 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15015 \begin_inset Note Note
15018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15019 For more on phantoms see section
15020 \begin_inset space ~
15024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15026 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15036 \begin_inset Newline newline
15042 \begin_layout Itemize
15047 fonts use characters with serifs.
15048 These are the small
15049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15056 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15057 The following example shows the difference:
15058 \begin_inset Newline newline
15062 \begin_inset Newline newline
15067 text without serifs
15070 \begin_inset Newline newline
15073 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15074 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15081 \begin_layout Itemize
15086 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15087 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15088 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15091 \begin_layout Standard
15092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15099 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15100 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15103 \begin_inset space ~
15108 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15109 the property to be removed.
15110 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15111 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15112 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15130 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15131 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15139 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15143 \begin_inset space ~
15148 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15159 If you, for example, set
15160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15178 \begin_inset space ~
15183 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15192 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15196 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15197 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15200 \begin_layout Section
15201 Printing and Previewing
15204 \begin_layout Subsection
15208 \begin_layout Standard
15209 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15210 using \SpecialChar LyX
15211 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15212 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15213 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15214 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15216 Additional Features
15221 \begin_layout Standard
15223 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15226 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15227 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15228 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15231 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15232 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15233 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15234 to turn your writing into printable output.
15235 This happens in two stages:
15238 \begin_layout Enumerate
15239 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15240 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15242 a file with the extension,
15243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15257 \begin_layout Enumerate
15258 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15259 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15260 to use the commands in the
15264 file to produce printable output.
15267 \begin_layout Subsection
15268 Output file formats
15269 \begin_inset Index idx
15272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15281 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15289 Simple text (ASCII)
15290 \begin_inset Index idx
15293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15294 File formats ! ASCII
15302 \begin_layout Standard
15303 This file type has the extension
15304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15316 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15320 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15327 \begin_layout Standard
15328 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15330 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15331 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15333 \begin_inset space ~
15339 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15340 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15341 bibliography (section
15342 \begin_inset space ~
15346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15348 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15353 If your document includes such material, use
15355 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15356 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15358 \begin_inset space ~
15362 \begin_inset space ~
15366 \begin_inset space ~
15374 \begin_inset space ~
15378 \begin_inset space ~
15384 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15385 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15391 \begin_inset Index idx
15394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15395 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15404 \begin_layout Standard
15405 This file type has the extension
15406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15417 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15420 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15421 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15422 -Errors or to process it manually
15423 with console commands.
15424 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15425 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15426 's temporary directory whenever you
15427 view or export your document.
15430 \begin_layout Standard
15431 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15432 -file using the menu
15434 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15435 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15439 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15440 export variants are explained in section
15441 \begin_inset space ~
15445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15447 reference "subsec:Export"
15454 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15456 \begin_inset Index idx
15459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15468 \begin_layout Standard
15469 This file type has the extension
15470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15490 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15491 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15492 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15496 \begin_layout Standard
15497 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15498 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15499 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15500 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15501 when you view the DVI.
15502 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15505 \begin_layout Standard
15506 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15508 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15509 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15514 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15515 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15517 \begin_inset space ~
15523 The latter option uses the program
15525 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15531 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15534 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15535 font access (see section
15536 \begin_inset space ~
15540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15542 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15547 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15548 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15553 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15555 \begin_inset Index idx
15558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15559 File formats ! PostScript
15567 \begin_layout Standard
15568 This file type has the extension
15569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15581 PostScript was developed by the company
15585 as a printer language.
15586 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15588 PostScript can be seen as a
15589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15592 programming language
15593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15596 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15601 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15608 \begin_inset Index idx
15611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15613 -packages ! pstricks
15623 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15626 \begin_layout Standard
15627 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15631 Encapsulated PostScript
15632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15635 (EPS, file extension
15636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15648 As \SpecialChar LyX
15649 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15650 convert them in the background to EPS.
15651 If, for example, you have 50
15652 \begin_inset space ~
15655 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15657 \begin_inset space ~
15660 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15661 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15663 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15664 EPS to avoid this problem.
15667 \begin_layout Standard
15668 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15670 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15671 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15677 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15679 \begin_inset Index idx
15682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15689 \begin_inset Index idx
15692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15701 \begin_layout Standard
15702 This file type has the extension
15703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15719 Portable Document Format
15720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15727 was derived from PostScript.
15728 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15737 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15738 looks exactly the same.
15741 \begin_layout Standard
15742 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15746 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15750 (JPG, file extension
15751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15778 Portable Network Graphics
15779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15782 (PNG, file extension
15783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15795 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15796 converts them in the
15797 background to one of these formats.
15798 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15799 will slow down your workflow.
15800 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15803 \begin_layout Standard
15804 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15806 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15812 \begin_layout Description
15814 \begin_inset space ~
15817 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15821 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15824 \begin_layout Description
15826 \begin_inset space ~
15833 ) This uses the program
15835 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15838 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15841 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15844 is a new engine, derived from
15848 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15849 access (see section
15850 \begin_inset space ~
15854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15856 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15861 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15862 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15867 \begin_layout Description
15869 \begin_inset space ~
15876 ) This uses the program
15881 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15887 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15888 font access (see section
15889 \begin_inset space ~
15893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15895 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15900 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15901 vertically written Japanese.
15904 \begin_layout Description
15906 \begin_inset space ~
15909 (cropped) This is the same as
15912 \begin_inset space ~
15917 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15918 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15919 to generate good-looking
15920 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15923 \begin_layout Description
15925 \begin_inset space ~
15928 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15932 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15936 \begin_layout Description
15938 \begin_inset space ~
15941 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15945 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15946 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15950 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15951 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15954 \begin_layout Standard
15958 \begin_inset space ~
15967 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15968 works without problems.
15969 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15970 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15974 \begin_inset space ~
15982 \begin_inset space ~
15987 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15995 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15997 \begin_inset Index idx
16000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16001 FileFormats ! XHTML
16007 \begin_inset Index idx
16010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16019 \begin_layout Standard
16020 This file type has the extension
16021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16033 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16034 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16035 When \SpecialChar LyX
16036 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16037 suitable for the purpose.
16038 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16040 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16041 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16044 between different formats, which are described in section
16046 Math Output in XHTML
16051 \begin_inset space ~
16059 \begin_layout Standard
16060 XHTML output remains
16061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16068 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16069 features are supported yet.
16073 and the World Wide Web
16077 Additional Features
16079 manual, for more information.
16082 \begin_layout Standard
16083 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16085 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16086 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16092 \begin_layout Subsection
16094 \begin_inset Index idx
16097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16106 \begin_layout Standard
16107 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16108 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16117 or use the toolbar button
16124 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16125 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16126 \begin_inset space ~
16130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16132 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16136 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16138 \begin_inset space ~
16142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16144 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16149 Further output formats can be selected via
16151 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16152 View (Other Formats)
16154 or the toolbar button
16163 \begin_layout Standard
16164 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16165 viewer window using the menu
16167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16173 Update (Other Formats)
16178 \begin_layout Standard
16179 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16182 To have a real output, export your document.
16185 \begin_layout Section
16186 A few Words about Typography
16187 \begin_inset Index idx
16190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16199 \begin_layout Subsection
16200 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16201 \begin_inset Index idx
16204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16211 \begin_inset Index idx
16214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16223 \begin_layout Standard
16224 In \SpecialChar LyX
16226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16237 character comes in four lengths: the
16249 , and the minus sign:
16250 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16256 \begin_layout Standard
16257 \begin_inset Tabular
16258 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16259 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16260 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16261 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16262 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16263 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16332 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16359 \begin_inset space ~
16362 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16369 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16394 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16396 \begin_inset space ~
16399 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16420 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16454 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16460 \begin_layout Standard
16461 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16473 character multiple times in a row.
16474 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16475 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16508 \begin_layout Standard
16509 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16510 math mode and has a length of its own.
16511 Here are some examples:
16514 \begin_layout Enumerate
16515 line- and page-breaks
16516 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16526 \begin_layout Enumerate
16528 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16538 \begin_layout Enumerate
16539 Oh — there's a dash.
16540 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16550 \begin_layout Enumerate
16551 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16555 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16565 \begin_layout Subsection
16567 \begin_inset Index idx
16570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16579 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16586 \begin_layout Standard
16587 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16588 but automatically in the output.
16589 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16595 \begin_inset Index idx
16598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16605 following the rules of the document language.
16608 \begin_layout Standard
16610 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16614 font and with unusual constructs, like
16615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16623 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16624 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16625 This is done with the menu
16627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16628 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16630 \begin_inset space ~
16636 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16638 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16642 \begin_layout Standard
16643 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16644 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16655 would then see the hyphen
16656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16663 as a hyphenation possibility.
16664 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16665 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16666 as described in section
16668 Prevent Hyphenation
16673 \begin_inset space ~
16681 \begin_layout Subsection
16683 \begin_inset Index idx
16686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16696 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16699 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16706 \begin_layout Standard
16707 When \SpecialChar LyX
16708 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16709 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16711 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16717 appropriate amount of space.
16718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16721 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16723 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16724 gets after another word.
16727 \begin_layout Standard
16728 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16729 not work in all cases.
16731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16742 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16743 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16746 \begin_layout Standard
16747 Here are some examples of
16751 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16754 \begin_layout Itemize
16759 \begin_layout Itemize
16764 \begin_layout Standard
16765 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16768 \begin_layout Itemize
16770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16774 this is too much space!
16777 \begin_layout Itemize
16782 \begin_layout Standard
16783 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16786 \begin_layout Standard
16787 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16790 \begin_layout Enumerate
16794 \begin_inset space ~
16799 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16800 \begin_inset space ~
16804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16806 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16811 \begin_inset Index idx
16814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16815 Spaces ! inter-word
16823 \begin_layout Enumerate
16827 \begin_inset space ~
16832 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16833 \begin_inset space ~
16837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16839 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16844 \begin_inset Index idx
16847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16856 \begin_layout Enumerate
16860 \begin_inset space ~
16864 \begin_inset space ~
16868 \begin_inset space ~
16875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16877 \begin_inset space ~
16882 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16883 This function is also bound to
16886 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16892 \begin_layout Standard
16893 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16896 \begin_layout Itemize
16898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16902 \begin_inset space \space{}
16905 this is too much space!
16908 \begin_layout Itemize
16909 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16913 \begin_layout Standard
16914 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16915 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16917 will take care of this.
16920 \begin_layout Standard
16921 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16925 \begin_inset space ~
16931 feature described in the section
16933 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16938 Additional Features
16943 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16945 \begin_inset Index idx
16948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16949 Typography ! Quotation marks
16955 \begin_inset Index idx
16958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16959 Quotation marks | see
16963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16989 \begin_layout Standard
16991 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
16992 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
16993 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
16995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17003 The keyboard character,
17007 , generates this automatically.
17010 \begin_layout Standard
17011 You can specify what character the
17015 key produces by using the submenu
17021 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17025 \begin_inset Index idx
17028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17029 Document ! Settings
17034 dialog and switching the
17038 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17039 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17041 \begin_inset space ~
17047 \begin_layout Labeling
17048 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17060 \begin_inset space ~
17064 \begin_inset space ~
17068 \begin_inset Quotes els
17072 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17086 \begin_inset Quotes els
17090 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17093 quotation marks (as common, e.
17094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17100 \begin_layout Labeling
17101 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17104 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17108 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17112 \begin_inset space ~
17116 \begin_inset space ~
17120 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17124 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17130 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17134 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17138 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17142 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17145 quotation marks (as common, e.
17146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17152 \begin_layout Labeling
17153 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17156 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17160 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17164 \begin_inset space ~
17168 \begin_inset space ~
17172 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17176 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17182 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17186 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17190 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17194 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17197 quotation marks (as common, e.
17198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17204 \begin_layout Labeling
17205 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17208 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17212 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17216 \begin_inset space ~
17220 \begin_inset space ~
17224 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17228 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17234 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17238 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17242 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17246 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17249 quotation marks (as common, e.
17250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17256 \begin_layout Labeling
17257 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17260 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17264 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17268 \begin_inset space ~
17272 \begin_inset space ~
17276 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17280 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17286 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17290 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17294 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17298 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17301 quotation marks (as common, e.
17302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17305 g., in Switzerland)
17308 \begin_layout Labeling
17309 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17312 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17316 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17320 \begin_inset space ~
17324 \begin_inset space ~
17328 \begin_inset Quotes als
17332 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17338 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17342 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17346 \begin_inset Quotes als
17350 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17353 quotation marks (as common, e.
17354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17360 \begin_layout Labeling
17361 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17364 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17368 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17372 \begin_inset space ~
17376 \begin_inset space ~
17380 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17384 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17390 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17394 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17398 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17402 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17405 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17408 \begin_layout Labeling
17409 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17412 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17416 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17420 \begin_inset space ~
17424 \begin_inset space ~
17428 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17432 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17438 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17442 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17446 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17450 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17453 quotation marks (as common, e.
17454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17457 g., in Great Britain)
17460 \begin_layout Labeling
17461 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17464 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17468 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17472 \begin_inset space ~
17476 \begin_inset space ~
17480 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17484 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17490 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17494 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17498 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17502 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17505 quotation marks (as common, e.
17506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17512 \begin_layout Labeling
17513 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17516 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17520 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17524 \begin_inset space ~
17528 \begin_inset space ~
17532 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17536 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17542 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17546 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17550 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17554 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17557 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17562 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17563 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17564 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17565 the inner marks differ).
17573 \begin_layout Labeling
17574 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17577 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17581 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17585 \begin_inset space ~
17589 \begin_inset space ~
17593 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17597 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17603 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17607 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17611 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17615 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17618 quotation marks (as common, e.
17619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17625 \begin_layout Labeling
17626 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17629 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17633 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17637 \begin_inset space ~
17641 \begin_inset space ~
17645 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17649 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17655 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17659 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17663 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17667 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17670 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17673 \begin_layout Labeling
17674 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17675 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17683 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17689 \begin_inset space ~
17693 \begin_inset space ~
17699 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17707 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17711 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17715 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17719 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17723 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17726 quotation marks (as common, e.
17727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17735 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17736 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17744 \begin_layout Labeling
17745 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17746 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17754 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17760 \begin_inset space ~
17764 \begin_inset space ~
17770 \begin_inset Quotes kls
17778 \begin_inset Quotes krs
17782 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17786 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17790 \begin_inset Quotes kls
17794 \begin_inset Quotes krs
17797 quotation marks (as common, e.
17798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17801 g., in North Korea and China)
17805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17806 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17807 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17815 \begin_layout Standard
17816 Inner quotation marks
17820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17821 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
17822 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
17823 case (and specifically the British style shows that
17824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17831 does not necessarily mean
17832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17840 This is why we call them
17841 \begin_inset Quotes els
17845 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17861 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
17863 \begin_inset Quotes els
17867 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17870 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
17873 arg "quote-insert inner"
17878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17884 \begin_layout Standard
17885 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
17886 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
17887 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
17888 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
17889 If you check the setting
17891 Use dynamic quotation marks
17895 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17896 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17899 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
17900 they appear in a special color).
17901 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
17902 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
17904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17907 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
17910 \begin_layout Standard
17911 Individual quotation marks (i.
17912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17915 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
17916 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
17920 \begin_layout Subsection
17922 \begin_inset Index idx
17925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17926 Typography ! Ligatures
17932 \begin_inset Index idx
17935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17966 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17973 \begin_layout Standard
17974 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17975 print them as single characters.
17976 These groups are known as
17981 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17982 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17984 Here are the standard ligatures:
17987 \begin_layout Itemize
17991 \begin_layout Itemize
17995 \begin_layout Itemize
17999 \begin_layout Itemize
18003 \begin_layout Itemize
18007 \begin_layout Standard
18008 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18011 \begin_layout Standard
18012 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18013 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18021 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18037 To break a ligature, use
18039 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18040 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18042 \begin_inset space ~
18049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18060 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18077 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18085 \begin_layout Subsection
18087 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18089 \begin_inset Index idx
18092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18102 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18109 \begin_layout Standard
18112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18113 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18117 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18120 \begin_layout Description
18122 The name of the game.
18125 \begin_layout Description
18127 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18131 \begin_layout Description
18133 The \SpecialChar TeX
18134 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18138 \begin_layout Description
18139 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18140 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18144 \begin_layout Standard
18145 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18151 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18159 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18160 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18161 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18162 converges to the number
18163 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18166 : The actual version is
18167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18175 , the previous one was
18176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18187 \begin_layout Subsection
18189 \begin_inset Index idx
18192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18201 \begin_layout Standard
18202 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18203 space between two words.
18204 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18214 for units use the menu
18216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18217 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18219 \begin_inset space ~
18227 arg "space-insert thin"
18233 \begin_layout Standard
18234 Here is an example to show the differences:
18237 \begin_layout Standard
18238 \begin_inset Tabular
18239 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18240 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18241 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18242 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18249 \begin_inset space ~
18253 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18265 space between number and unit
18272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18281 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18293 half space between number and unit
18306 \begin_layout Subsection
18308 \begin_inset Index idx
18311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18312 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18320 \begin_layout Standard
18321 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18323 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18324 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18325 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18326 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18327 These bits of text became known as
18338 \begin_layout Standard
18339 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18340 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18341 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18342 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18343 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18344 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18345 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18346 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18347 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18348 \begin_inset Newline newline
18356 \begin_inset Newline newline
18364 \begin_inset Newline newline
18367 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18368 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18369 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18371 \begin_inset space ~
18375 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18377 key "latexcompanion"
18383 \begin_inset space ~
18387 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18394 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18395 's page break mechanism.
18398 \begin_layout Chapter
18399 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18402 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18409 \begin_layout Standard
18410 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18413 \begin_inset space ~
18419 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18422 \begin_layout Section
18424 \begin_inset Index idx
18427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18443 \begin_layout Standard
18445 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18448 \begin_layout Description
18451 \begin_inset space ~
18454 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18455 \begin_inset Newline newline
18459 \begin_inset Note Note
18462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18463 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18471 \begin_layout Description
18472 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18473 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18474 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18477 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18478 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18480 \begin_inset space ~
18486 \begin_inset Newline newline
18490 \begin_inset Note Comment
18493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18494 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18503 \begin_layout Description
18505 \begin_inset space ~
18508 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18509 set in the document settings under
18511 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18513 \begin_inset space ~
18519 \begin_inset Newline newline
18523 \begin_inset Newline newline
18527 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18536 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18537 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18542 of a comment that appears in the output.
18548 \begin_inset Newline newline
18552 \begin_inset Newline newline
18555 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18558 \begin_layout Standard
18559 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18571 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18574 \begin_layout Section
18576 \begin_inset Index idx
18579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18586 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18588 name "sec:Footnotes"
18595 \begin_layout Standard
18597 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18600 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18603 or the toolbar button
18606 arg "footnote-insert"
18618 \begin_inset Graphics
18619 filename clipart/footnote.png
18628 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18629 's representation of your footnote.
18639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18658 label, the box will
18662 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18663 Clicking on the box label again will close
18676 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18677 and click on the footnote
18692 \begin_layout Standard
18693 Here is an example footnote:
18701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18702 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18710 \begin_layout Standard
18711 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18712 position where the footnote box is placed.
18713 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18714 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18715 according to the document class.
18717 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18718 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18724 ey are described in the
18727 \begin_inset space ~
18735 \begin_layout Section
18737 \begin_inset Index idx
18740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18747 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18749 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18756 \begin_layout Standard
18757 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18759 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18761 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18763 \begin_inset space ~
18768 or the toolbar button
18771 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18797 appearing within your text.
18798 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18799 's representation of your margin
18808 \begin_layout Standard
18809 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18813 \begin_inset Marginal
18816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 This is a marginal note.
18826 \begin_layout Standard
18827 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18828 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18829 pages, right on odd pages.
18832 \begin_layout Standard
18833 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18836 \begin_inset space ~
18844 \begin_inset space ~
18852 \begin_layout Section
18853 Graphics and Images
18854 \begin_inset Index idx
18857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18864 \begin_inset Index idx
18867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18876 name "sec:Graphics"
18883 \begin_layout Standard
18884 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18885 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18888 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18897 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18900 \begin_layout Standard
18901 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18906 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18907 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18909 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18910 \begin_inset space ~
18914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18916 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18923 \begin_layout Standard
18928 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18929 of the image in the output.
18930 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18934 \begin_inset space ~
18938 \begin_inset space ~
18947 \begin_inset space ~
18951 \begin_inset space ~
18955 \begin_inset space ~
18960 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18961 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18969 \begin_layout Standard
18973 \begin_inset space ~
18977 \begin_inset space ~
18982 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18983 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18985 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18990 \begin_inset space ~
18995 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18996 with the image size is printed.
18999 \begin_layout Standard
19000 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19001 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19003 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19006 \begin_layout Standard
19008 \begin_inset Graphics
19009 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19017 \begin_layout Standard
19018 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19019 the image into a float, see section
19020 \begin_inset space ~
19024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19026 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19033 \begin_layout Subsection
19035 \begin_inset Index idx
19038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19047 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19054 \begin_layout Standard
19055 You can insert images in any known file format.
19056 But as we explained in section
19057 \begin_inset space ~
19061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19063 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19067 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19069 therefore uses the program
19073 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19074 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19075 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19076 \begin_inset space ~
19080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19082 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19089 \begin_layout Standard
19090 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19093 \begin_layout Description
19095 \begin_inset space ~
19098 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19099 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19100 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19104 Graphics Interchange Format
19105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19108 (GIF, file extension
19109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19121 \begin_inset Index idx
19124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19156 Portable Network Graphics
19157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19160 (PNG, file extension
19161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19173 \begin_inset Index idx
19176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19208 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19212 (JPG, file extension
19213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19237 \begin_inset Index idx
19240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19271 \begin_layout Description
19273 \begin_inset space ~
19276 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19278 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19279 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19280 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19281 \begin_inset Newline newline
19284 Scalable image formats can be
19285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19288 Scalable Vector Graphics
19289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19292 (SVG, file extension
19293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19305 \begin_inset Index idx
19308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19340 Encapsulated PostScript
19341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19344 (EPS, file extension
19345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19357 \begin_inset Index idx
19360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19392 Portable Document Format
19393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19396 (PDF, file extension
19397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19409 \begin_inset Index idx
19412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19427 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19428 result will not be scalable.
19429 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19435 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19443 \begin_layout Standard
19444 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19451 \begin_layout Subsection
19452 Grouping of Image Settings
19453 \begin_inset Index idx
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 Images ! Settings grouping
19465 \begin_layout Standard
19466 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19468 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19469 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19471 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19472 need to manually change each of them.
19476 \begin_layout Standard
19477 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19480 \begin_inset space ~
19484 \begin_inset space ~
19496 \begin_inset space ~
19500 \begin_inset space ~
19506 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19507 and checking the name of the desired group.
19510 \begin_layout Section
19512 \begin_inset Index idx
19515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19531 \begin_layout Standard
19532 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19535 arg "tabular-insert"
19540 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19544 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19545 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19546 from the rest of the table.
19547 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19548 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19550 Here is an example table:
19553 \begin_layout Standard
19555 \begin_inset Tabular
19556 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19557 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19560 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19561 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19761 \begin_layout Subsection
19765 \begin_layout Standard
19766 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19769 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19773 This brings up the table dialog.
19774 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19775 cursor is placed currently.
19776 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19777 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19778 done on all of your selection.
19781 \begin_layout Standard
19782 In addition to the table dialog, the
19785 \begin_inset space ~
19790 helps you in setting table properties.
19791 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19794 \begin_layout Standard
19798 \begin_inset space ~
19803 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19804 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19805 current cell respectively.
19806 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19808 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19809 of text, see section
19810 \begin_inset space ~
19814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19816 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19823 \begin_layout Standard
19824 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19825 using the check box
19834 This will merge the cells to
19838 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19839 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19840 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19841 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19842 in the last row without the upper border:
19845 \begin_layout Standard
19847 \begin_inset Tabular
19848 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19849 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19850 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19851 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19852 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19853 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19864 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19873 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19949 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19984 \begin_layout Standard
19985 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19986 -arguments for the table.
19987 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19988 explained in the chapter
19995 \begin_inset space ~
20001 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20002 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20003 but are visible in the output.
20006 \begin_layout Standard
20007 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20015 Most DVI-viewers are
20019 able to display rotations.
20027 \begin_layout Standard
20032 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20037 adds lines for all cell borders.
20040 \begin_layout Subsection
20042 \begin_inset Index idx
20045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20046 Tables ! Multi-page
20052 \begin_inset Index idx
20055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20064 \begin_layout Standard
20065 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20068 \begin_inset space ~
20072 \begin_inset space ~
20080 \begin_inset space ~
20085 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20086 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20089 \begin_layout Description
20094 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20095 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20096 Except for the first page, if
20099 \begin_inset space ~
20107 \begin_layout Description
20111 \begin_inset space ~
20116 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20117 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20120 \begin_layout Description
20125 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20126 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20127 except for the last page, if
20130 \begin_inset space ~
20138 \begin_layout Description
20142 \begin_inset space ~
20147 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20148 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20151 \begin_layout Description
20152 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20153 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20159 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20162 \begin_inset space ~
20170 \begin_layout Standard
20171 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20172 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20173 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20179 In this context, first means first in this order:
20182 \begin_inset space ~
20194 \begin_inset space ~
20199 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20202 \begin_layout Standard
20204 \begin_inset Tabular
20205 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20206 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20207 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20208 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20209 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20210 <row endfirsthead="true">
20211 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20217 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20222 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20231 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 <row endfirsthead="true">
20242 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20253 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20262 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 <row endhead="true">
20275 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20286 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 <row endhead="true">
20306 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20317 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20326 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20338 <row endfoot="true">
20339 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20350 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20359 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20390 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21331 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21340 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21349 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21360 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21422 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21453 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21484 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21639 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21670 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21701 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21763 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21794 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21825 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21856 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21887 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21918 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21949 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21980 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22011 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22042 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22073 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22104 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22135 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22166 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22228 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22259 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22290 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22320 <row endlastfoot="true">
22321 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22332 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22341 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22358 \begin_layout Subsection
22360 \begin_inset Index idx
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22372 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22379 \begin_layout Standard
22380 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22381 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22382 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22383 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22387 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22390 \begin_layout Standard
22391 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22392 for the column in the table dialog.
22393 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22394 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22398 \begin_layout Standard
22400 \begin_inset Tabular
22401 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22402 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22403 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22404 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22405 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22425 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22494 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 This is longer now.
22555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22606 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22607 This is longer now.
22612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 \begin_layout Standard
22639 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22640 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22645 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22646 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22652 Selection with the mouse or with
22656 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22657 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22658 the selection from outside the table.
22661 \begin_layout Section
22663 \begin_inset Index idx
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22682 \begin_layout Subsection
22686 \begin_layout Standard
22687 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22688 have a fixed location.
22690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22697 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22705 \begin_inset space ~
22710 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22711 too many notes on the current page.
22714 \begin_layout Standard
22715 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22716 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22717 and pages without text.
22718 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22719 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22720 Floats are therefore numbered.
22721 Referencing is described in section
22722 \begin_inset space ~
22726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22728 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22735 \begin_layout Standard
22736 To insert a float, use the menu
22738 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22742 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22743 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22745 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22746 \begin_inset Index idx
22749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22755 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22756 paragraph within the float.
22757 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22758 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22759 left-clicking on the box label.
22760 A closed float box looks like this:
22761 \begin_inset Graphics
22762 filename clipart/float.png
22767 – a gray button with a red label.
22770 \begin_layout Standard
22771 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22773 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22776 \begin_layout Subsection
22778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22780 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22785 \begin_inset Index idx
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22789 Floats ! Figure floats
22797 \begin_layout Standard
22799 \begin_inset space ~
22803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22805 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22809 was created using the menu
22811 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22812 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22818 arg "float-insert figure"
22822 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22825 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22831 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22835 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22836 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22838 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22840 \begin_inset space ~
22848 arg "layout-paragraph"
22854 \begin_layout Standard
22855 \begin_inset Float figure
22860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22862 \begin_inset Graphics
22863 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22873 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22878 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22882 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22895 \begin_layout Standard
22896 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22897 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22899 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22908 ) and refer to it using the menu
22910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22916 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22920 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22921 vague references like
22922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22929 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22930 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22940 For more about cross-references, see section
22941 \begin_inset space ~
22945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22947 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22954 \begin_layout Standard
22955 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22956 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22957 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22958 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22959 as described in section
22960 \begin_inset space ~
22964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22966 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22972 \begin_inset space ~
22976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22978 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22982 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22983 You can also set the images one below the other.
22985 \begin_inset space ~
22989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22991 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22998 reference "fig:Platypus"
23002 are the subfigures.
23005 \begin_layout Standard
23006 \begin_inset Float figure
23011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23012 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23016 \begin_inset Float figure
23021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23022 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23027 name "fig:Undefinable"
23039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23040 \begin_inset Graphics
23041 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23052 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23056 \begin_inset Float figure
23061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23062 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23067 name "fig:Platypus"
23079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23080 \begin_inset Graphics
23081 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23093 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23100 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23105 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23109 Two distorted images.
23122 \begin_layout Subsection
23124 \begin_inset Index idx
23127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23128 Floats ! Table floats
23136 \begin_layout Standard
23137 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23139 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23140 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23143 or the toolbar button
23146 arg "float-insert table"
23150 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23151 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23152 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23154 \begin_inset space ~
23158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23160 reference "tab:Table-float"
23167 \begin_layout Standard
23168 \begin_inset Float table
23173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23174 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23179 name "tab:Table-float"
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23193 \begin_inset Tabular
23194 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23195 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23196 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23197 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23198 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23325 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23346 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23349 \end{array}\right]$
23357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23370 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23391 \begin_layout Subsection
23393 \begin_inset Index idx
23396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23405 \begin_layout Standard
23407 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23408 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23409 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23411 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23419 \begin_inset space ~
23427 \begin_layout Section
23429 \begin_inset Index idx
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23441 \begin_layout Standard
23443 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23445 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23446 \begin_inset space \space{}
23453 \begin_layout Standard
23454 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23455 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23457 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23461 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23462 and its alignment within the page.
23465 \begin_layout Standard
23467 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23477 height_special "totalheight"
23482 backgroundcolor "none"
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23488 This is a minipage.
23489 The text is set in an italic style.
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23495 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23496 another formatting.
23504 \begin_layout Standard
23505 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23508 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23512 as described in section
23513 \begin_inset space ~
23517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23519 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23524 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23530 \begin_layout Standard
23531 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23541 height_special "totalheight"
23546 backgroundcolor "none"
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23550 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23551 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23557 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23561 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23571 height_special "totalheight"
23576 backgroundcolor "none"
23579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23580 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23581 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23589 \begin_layout Standard
23590 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23596 \begin_layout Standard
23597 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23599 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23606 \begin_inset space ~
23614 \begin_layout Chapter
23615 Mathematical Formulas
23616 \begin_inset Index idx
23619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 \begin_inset Index idx
23629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23660 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23667 \begin_layout Standard
23668 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23673 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23676 \begin_layout Section
23678 \begin_inset Index idx
23681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23690 \begin_layout Standard
23691 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23704 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23706 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23707 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23708 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23716 \begin_layout Standard
23717 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23721 \begin_inset space ~
23726 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23729 \begin_layout Standard
23730 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23731 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23734 \begin_layout Standard
23735 This is a line with an inline formula
23736 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23742 \begin_layout Standard
23743 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23744 paragraph, like this one:
23745 \begin_inset Formula
23752 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23755 \begin_layout Standard
23757 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23759 For example, typing
23760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23773 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23774 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23778 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23781 \begin_inset space ~
23789 \begin_layout Subsection
23790 Navigating in Formulas
23791 \begin_inset Index idx
23794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23803 \begin_layout Standard
23804 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23805 achieved with the arrow keys.
23807 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23808 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23813 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23814 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23818 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23822 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23825 \end{array}\right]$
23833 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23838 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23839 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23842 \begin_layout Standard
23847 , printed in this document as
23848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23852 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23859 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23860 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23861 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23866 For example, if you want
23867 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23875 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23885 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23889 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23894 , since in the latter case only the
23897 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23902 will be under the square root sign:
23903 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23909 \begin_layout Standard
23910 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23912 \begin_inset Formula
23914 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23923 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23924 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23927 \begin_layout Subsection
23931 \begin_layout Standard
23932 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23933 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23937 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23938 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23939 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23940 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23941 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23945 \begin_layout Subsection
23946 Exponents and Subscripts
23947 \begin_inset Index idx
23950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23957 \begin_inset Index idx
23960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23969 \begin_layout Standard
23970 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23973 arg "math-superscript"
23979 arg "math-subscript"
23982 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23984 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23987 , type in a formula
23990 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24000 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24006 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24010 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24016 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24022 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24031 , you have to use an extra
24035 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24036 For example, if you want
24037 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24043 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24049 Subscripts are similar: To get
24050 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24056 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24064 \begin_layout Subsection
24066 \begin_inset Index idx
24069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 \begin_layout Standard
24079 Create a fraction either with the command
24085 or by using the icon
24088 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24094 \begin_inset space ~
24100 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24101 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24102 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24107 To move back up, press
24112 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24113 \begin_inset Formula
24115 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24118 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24126 \begin_layout Subsection
24128 \begin_inset Index idx
24131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24140 \begin_layout Standard
24141 Roots can be created using the
24144 \begin_inset space ~
24152 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24158 arg "math-insert \\root"
24180 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24186 always produces a square root.
24189 \begin_layout Subsection
24190 Operators with Limits
24191 \begin_inset Index idx
24194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24201 \begin_inset Index idx
24204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24213 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24220 \begin_layout Standard
24222 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24226 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24229 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24230 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24231 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24232 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24233 The sum operator will automatically place its
24234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24241 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24243 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24247 \begin_inset Formula
24249 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24254 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24258 \begin_layout Standard
24259 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24261 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24262 behind the operator and using the menu
24264 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24265 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24267 \begin_inset space ~
24271 \begin_inset space ~
24285 \begin_layout Standard
24286 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24295 \begin_inset Index idx
24298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24305 \begin_inset Formula
24307 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24312 which will place the
24313 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24325 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24326 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24332 \begin_layout Standard
24333 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24340 Have a look at section
24341 \begin_inset space ~
24345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24347 reference "subsec:Functions"
24351 for an explanation of function macros.
24354 \begin_layout Subsection
24356 \begin_inset Index idx
24359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24368 \begin_layout Standard
24369 Most math symbols can be found in the
24372 \begin_inset space ~
24377 under one of several categories; including
24394 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24398 \begin_layout Standard
24399 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24400 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24401 don't have to use the
24404 \begin_inset space ~
24409 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24411 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24414 \begin_layout Subsection
24416 \begin_inset Index idx
24419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 \begin_layout Standard
24429 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24435 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24441 \begin_inset space ~
24449 arg "math-insert \\space"
24453 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24454 For example, the sequence
24459 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24462 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24464 \begin_inset Graphics
24465 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24470 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24471 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24472 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24473 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24474 , because they are negative
24476 Here are two examples:
24479 \begin_layout Standard
24489 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24495 \begin_layout Standard
24505 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24511 \begin_layout Subsection
24513 \begin_inset Index idx
24516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24525 name "subsec:Functions"
24532 \begin_layout Standard
24536 \begin_inset space ~
24541 contains under the button
24544 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24547 a number of function macros, such as
24548 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24552 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24560 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24567 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24568 avoid confusions, because
24569 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24573 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24579 \begin_layout Standard
24580 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24582 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24586 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24592 \begin_layout Standard
24593 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24594 are placed, as described in section
24595 \begin_inset space ~
24599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24601 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24608 \begin_layout Subsection
24610 \begin_inset Index idx
24613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24622 \begin_layout Standard
24623 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24625 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24626 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24627 commands, for example, to enter
24628 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24631 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24632 Our example is entered by typing
24637 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24644 \begin_inset space ~
24648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24650 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24654 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24657 \begin_layout Standard
24658 \begin_inset Float table
24663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24664 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24669 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24673 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24683 \begin_inset Tabular
24684 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24685 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24686 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24687 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24688 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24772 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24826 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24880 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24934 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24988 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25042 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25096 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25150 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25204 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25249 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25270 \begin_layout Standard
25271 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25274 \begin_inset space ~
25282 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25285 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25289 \begin_layout Section
25290 Brackets and Delimiters
25291 \begin_inset Index idx
25294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25301 \begin_inset Index idx
25304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25313 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25320 \begin_layout Standard
25321 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25323 For some purposes, using just the keys
25328 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25329 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25330 toolbar delimiter icon
25333 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25337 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25338 \begin_inset Formula
25340 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25348 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25349 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25353 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25356 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25362 \begin_inset Formula
25364 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25372 \begin_layout Standard
25373 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25374 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25378 \begin_layout Standard
25379 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25380 left side and right side.
25381 If you use the option
25384 \begin_inset space ~
25389 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25390 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25392 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25397 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25398 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25401 \begin_layout Standard
25402 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25403 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25404 is to go inside the brackets.
25405 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25410 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25411 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25412 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25416 arg "math-delim ( )"
25422 \begin_layout Section
25423 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25424 \begin_inset Index idx
25427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25434 \begin_inset Index idx
25437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25444 \begin_inset Index idx
25447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25448 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25456 \begin_layout Standard
25457 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25461 \begin_inset space ~
25469 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25473 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25474 Here is an example:
25475 \begin_inset Formula
25477 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25486 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25487 \begin_inset space ~
25491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25493 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25498 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25499 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25500 This alignment is set in the box
25505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25554 for every column as default.
25555 For example, the sequence
25556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25567 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25568 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25569 corresponds to the relevant column.
25570 The result will look like this:
25571 \begin_inset Formula
25574 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25575 column & has & has\,right\\
25576 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25585 \begin_layout Standard
25586 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25589 arg "newline-insert newline"
25592 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25593 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25595 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25598 or the math toolbar.
25601 \begin_layout Standard
25602 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25603 It can be created with the menu
25605 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25606 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25608 \begin_inset space ~
25620 Here is an example:
25621 \begin_inset Formula
25635 \begin_layout Standard
25636 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25639 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25642 arg "newline-insert newline"
25646 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25651 arg "newline-insert newline"
25654 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25662 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25663 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25664 A new row is created by every further entry of
25667 arg "newline-insert newline"
25671 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25672 Here is an example:
25673 \begin_inset Formula
25675 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25676 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25681 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25682 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25683 \begin_inset Formula
25685 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25693 \begin_layout Standard
25694 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25701 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25702 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25705 reference "eq:asquared"
25710 The other types are described in section
25711 \begin_inset space ~
25715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25717 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25724 \begin_layout Section
25725 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25726 \begin_inset Index idx
25729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25730 Math ! Formula numbering
25736 \begin_inset Index idx
25739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25740 Math ! Referencing formulas
25746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25748 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25755 \begin_layout Standard
25756 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25758 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25759 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25761 \begin_inset space ~
25765 \begin_inset space ~
25773 arg "math-number-toggle"
25777 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25778 within parentheses.
25779 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25780 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25781 the document class.
25782 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25783 separated by a dot:
25784 \begin_inset Formula
25794 arg "math-number-toggle"
25797 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25798 You can only number displayed formulas.
25801 \begin_layout Standard
25802 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25804 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25805 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25807 \begin_inset space ~
25811 \begin_inset space ~
25819 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25822 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25823 \begin_inset Formula
25826 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25832 To number all lines use the shortcut
25835 arg "math-number-toggle"
25841 \begin_layout Standard
25842 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25845 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25846 A label is inserted with the menu
25848 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25857 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25858 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25859 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25871 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25872 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25873 We inserted in the following example the label
25874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25881 in the second line:
25882 \begin_inset Formula
25884 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25885 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25890 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25891 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25892 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25894 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25896 \begin_inset space ~
25904 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25908 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25909 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25910 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25911 as the formula number:
25914 \begin_layout Standard
25915 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25918 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25925 \begin_layout Standard
25926 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25927 's cross-reference box are described in section
25928 \begin_inset space ~
25932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25934 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25939 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25947 \begin_layout Section
25948 User defined math macros
25949 \begin_inset Index idx
25952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25961 \begin_layout Standard
25963 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25964 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25965 Math macros are explained in section
25968 \begin_inset space ~
25980 \begin_layout Section
25984 \begin_layout Subsection
25986 \begin_inset Index idx
25989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25998 \begin_layout Standard
25999 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26000 To set a font in a formula, use the
26003 \begin_inset space ~
26011 arg "math-insert \\font"
26014 , or enter its command, listed in table
26015 \begin_inset space ~
26019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26021 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26028 \begin_layout Standard
26029 \begin_inset Float table
26034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26035 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26040 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26044 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26054 \begin_inset Tabular
26055 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26056 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26057 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26058 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26090 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26117 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26144 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26177 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26204 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26231 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26265 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26292 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26326 \begin_layout Standard
26327 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26335 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26351 \begin_layout Standard
26352 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26353 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26358 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26359 space when you need a space in the box.
26360 Here is an example where
26361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26372 denotes the set of numbers:
26373 \begin_inset Formula
26375 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26383 \begin_layout Standard
26384 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26385 You can, for example, put a character in
26394 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26398 \begin_inset Newline newline
26401 So it is better not to use this feature.
26404 \begin_layout Standard
26405 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26406 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26410 \begin_inset Newline newline
26413 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26419 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26420 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26426 \begin_layout Standard
26433 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26436 \begin_layout Standard
26437 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26439 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26440 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26442 \begin_inset space ~
26450 \begin_layout Subsection
26452 \begin_inset Index idx
26455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26464 \begin_layout Standard
26465 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26467 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26471 \begin_inset space ~
26475 \begin_inset space ~
26483 \begin_inset space ~
26491 arg "math-insert \\font"
26495 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26496 in black instead of blue.
26497 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26498 Here is an example:
26499 \begin_inset Formula
26502 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26503 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26512 \begin_layout Subsection
26514 \begin_inset Index idx
26517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26526 \begin_layout Standard
26527 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26528 automatically chosen in most situations.
26546 For most characters,
26554 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26555 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26560 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26561 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26562 thinks are appropriate.
26563 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26566 arg "math-insert \\style"
26570 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26571 For example, you can set
26572 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26575 , which is normally in
26584 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26588 The four styles are used in the following example:
26591 \begin_layout Standard
26592 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26596 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26600 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26604 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26610 \begin_layout Standard
26611 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26612 is set in a particular size with the menu
26614 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26616 \begin_inset space ~
26621 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26622 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26623 will be adjusted to correspond.
26624 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26635 \begin_layout Standard
26639 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26645 \begin_layout Section
26646 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26648 \begin_inset Index idx
26651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26658 \begin_inset Index idx
26661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26670 \begin_layout Standard
26672 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26673 that are in common use.
26676 \begin_layout Subsection
26677 Enabling AMS-Support
26680 \begin_layout Standard
26681 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26682 the document by selecting the checkbox
26685 \begin_inset space ~
26689 \begin_inset space ~
26693 \begin_inset space ~
26700 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26704 \begin_inset Index idx
26707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26708 Document ! Settings
26716 \begin_inset space ~
26722 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26723 -errors in formulas,
26724 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26727 \begin_layout Subsection
26729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26731 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26736 \begin_inset Index idx
26739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26740 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26748 \begin_layout Standard
26749 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26750 provides a selection of different formula types.
26752 allows you to choose between
26773 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26774 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26781 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26784 \begin_layout Chapter
26788 \begin_layout Section
26790 \begin_inset Index idx
26793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26802 name "sec:Cross-References"
26809 \begin_layout Standard
26810 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26811 's strengths is cross-references.
26812 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26814 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26815 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26816 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26819 \begin_layout Enumerate
26823 \begin_layout Enumerate
26824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26826 name "enu:Second-item"
26833 \begin_layout Enumerate
26837 \begin_layout Standard
26838 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26843 or by pressing the toolbar button
26850 A gray label box like this:
26851 \begin_inset Graphics
26852 filename clipart/label.png
26856 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26858 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26893 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26894 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26910 \begin_layout Standard
26911 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26916 or the toolbar button
26919 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26923 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26924 \begin_inset Graphics
26925 filename clipart/reference.png
26929 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26931 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26944 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26948 \begin_layout Standard
26949 As an alternative to
26951 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26954 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26959 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26960 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26962 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26974 \begin_layout Standard
26975 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26976 \begin_inset space ~
26980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26982 reference "enu:Second-item"
26989 \begin_layout Standard
26990 It is recommended to use a protected space
26994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26995 described in section
26996 \begin_inset space ~
27000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27002 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27011 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27012 line breaks between them.
27015 \begin_layout Standard
27016 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27019 \begin_layout Description
27020 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27023 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27030 \begin_layout Description
27031 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27032 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27044 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27051 \begin_layout Description
27052 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27053 \begin_inset space ~
27057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27058 LatexCommand pageref
27059 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27066 \begin_layout Description
27068 \begin_inset space ~
27072 \begin_inset space ~
27075 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27077 LatexCommand vpageref
27078 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27083 \begin_inset Newline newline
27086 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27087 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27088 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27089 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27090 it prints “on the next page”.
27091 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27094 \begin_layout Description
27096 \begin_inset space ~
27100 \begin_inset space ~
27104 \begin_inset space ~
27107 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27110 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27115 \begin_inset Newline newline
27118 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27124 ; otherwise it behaves like
27128 \begin_inset space ~
27132 \begin_inset space ~
27141 \begin_layout Description
27143 \begin_inset space ~
27146 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27147 \begin_inset Newline newline
27151 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27159 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27169 \begin_inset Index idx
27172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27174 -packages ! prettyref
27180 \begin_inset Index idx
27183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27185 -packages ! refstyle
27196 \begin_inset Newline newline
27199 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27200 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27203 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27207 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27208 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27216 is the default and preferred because
27220 supports only English documents.
27221 The format is specified by using the command
27233 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27234 preamble of the document.
27235 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27253 \begin_inset Newline newline
27260 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27265 \begin_inset Newline newline
27276 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27277 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27279 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27280 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27285 , you might do so as follows:
27286 \begin_inset Newline newline
27293 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27298 \begin_inset Newline newline
27301 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27302 the package documentation
27303 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27305 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27311 \begin_inset Newline newline
27322 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27329 \begin_layout Description
27331 \begin_inset space ~
27334 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27336 LatexCommand nameref
27337 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27344 \begin_layout Description
27346 \begin_inset space ~
27349 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27350 label for the reference:
27351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27352 LatexCommand labelonly
27353 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27358 \begin_inset Newline newline
27361 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27362 Code, if you want to issue a command
27363 that \SpecialChar LyX
27369 , then you may want to use the
27372 \begin_inset space ~
27377 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27387 This is the form needed for e.
27388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27392 \begin_inset space \space{}
27399 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27400 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27402 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27406 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27410 \begin_layout Standard
27411 You can only use the style
27415 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27419 is always possible.
27422 \begin_layout Standard
27423 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27424 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27426 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27427 \begin_inset space ~
27431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27433 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27440 \begin_layout Standard
27441 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27445 \begin_inset space ~
27449 \begin_inset space ~
27454 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27455 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27458 \begin_inset space ~
27463 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27464 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27467 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27473 \begin_layout Standard
27474 You can change labels at any time.
27475 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27476 do not need to think about this.
27479 \begin_layout Standard
27480 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27482 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27486 \begin_layout Standard
27487 References are described in detail in the section
27488 \begin_inset space ~
27498 \begin_inset space ~
27506 \begin_layout Section
27507 Table of Contents and other Listings
27508 \begin_inset Index idx
27511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27518 \begin_inset Index idx
27521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27522 Navigating ! Outline
27528 \begin_inset Index idx
27531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27547 \begin_layout Subsection
27549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27551 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27558 \begin_layout Standard
27559 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27562 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27564 \begin_inset space ~
27568 \begin_inset space ~
27574 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27576 If you click on it, the
27580 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27581 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27582 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27584 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27586 \begin_inset space ~
27591 that is described in section
27592 \begin_inset space ~
27596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27598 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27605 \begin_layout Standard
27606 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27607 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27609 \begin_inset space ~
27613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27615 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27619 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27621 \begin_inset space ~
27625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27627 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27631 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27633 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27636 \begin_layout Subsection
27637 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27640 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27647 \begin_layout Standard
27648 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27650 You can insert them via the
27652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27656 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27659 \begin_layout Section
27660 URLs and Hyperlinks
27661 \begin_inset Index idx
27664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27671 \begin_inset Index idx
27674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27683 \begin_layout Subsection
27685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27694 \begin_layout Standard
27695 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27703 \begin_layout Standard
27704 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27706 \begin_inset Flex URL
27709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27719 \begin_layout Standard
27720 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27726 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27730 \begin_layout Standard
27731 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27739 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27748 \begin_layout Subsection
27750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27752 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27759 \begin_layout Standard
27760 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27762 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27765 or with the toolbar button
27772 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27781 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27782 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27783 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27785 name "LyX's homepage"
27786 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27791 , an Email address like this:
27792 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27794 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27795 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27801 , or a link to a file.
27804 \begin_layout Standard
27805 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27818 to the link target.
27821 \begin_layout Standard
27822 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27823 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27824 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27825 the text style dialog.
27826 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27830 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27832 name "LyX's homepage"
27833 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27841 \begin_layout Standard
27842 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27846 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27849 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27853 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27855 \begin_inset Newline newline
27863 \begin_inset Newline newline
27870 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27873 \begin_layout Section
27875 \begin_inset Index idx
27878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27887 name "sec:Appendices"
27894 \begin_layout Standard
27895 Appendices are created with the menu
27897 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27899 \begin_inset space ~
27903 \begin_inset space ~
27909 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27910 as the appendix part of the book.
27911 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27914 \begin_layout Standard
27915 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27916 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27917 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27918 and the subsection number.
27919 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27923 \begin_layout Standard
27925 \begin_inset space ~
27929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27931 reference "chap:Credits"
27936 \begin_inset space ~
27940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27942 reference "subsec:Export"
27949 \begin_layout Section
27951 \begin_inset Index idx
27954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27963 name "sec:Bibliography"
27970 \begin_layout Standard
27971 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27973 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
27974 \begin_inset space ~
27978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27980 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27987 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
27992 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
27993 \begin_inset space ~
27997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27999 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28004 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28006 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28008 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880176
28011 author-year citations,
28012 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883518
28013 and if you have more than a handful of references,
28016 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28018 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883526
28019 should seriously consider
28026 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880298
28028 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28031 a bibliography database.
28032 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883092
28036 \begin_layout Standard
28038 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883578
28039 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28040 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28044 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28045 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28046 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28047 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28048 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28053 \begin_layout Subsection
28054 The Bibliography Environment
28055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28057 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28064 \begin_layout Standard
28069 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28071 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28080 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28083 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880726
28084 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28085 of ASCII characters only.
28088 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28098 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28099 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880732
28103 \begin_layout Standard
28104 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28106 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28109 or the toolbar button
28112 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28116 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28117 containing the available citations.
28118 Select one or more keys from the list and
28128 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28129 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28133 \begin_layout Standard
28134 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28135 entry with surrounding brackets.
28140 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28141 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28153 \begin_layout Standard
28157 Companion Second Edition
28160 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28162 key "latexcompanion"
28170 \begin_layout Standard
28171 The \SpecialChar LyX
28172 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28173 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28181 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880908
28185 \begin_layout Standard
28187 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881419
28188 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using
28193 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28205 Author A and Author B(Year)
28206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28213 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28215 Then, if you select
28221 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28225 \begin_inset Index idx
28228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28230 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881295
28231 Document ! Settings
28238 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28244 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28251 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28256 \begin_layout Standard
28257 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28260 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28262 \begin_inset space ~
28270 arg "layout-paragraph"
28274 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28277 \begin_layout Subsection
28278 Bibliography databases
28279 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882661
28280 (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28284 \begin_inset Index idx
28287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28288 Bibliography ! Databases
28294 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882653
28296 \begin_inset Index idx
28299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28300 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28311 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28318 \begin_layout Standard
28319 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same
28320 \change_deleted -712698321 1483881524
28322 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881525
28325 in different documents.
28329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28330 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28332 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28333 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28338 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28340 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28341 your working field in a database.
28342 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28343 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28344 list for that document.
28345 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28349 \begin_layout Standard
28350 The database is a text file with the file extension
28351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28362 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28363 The format is explained in
28364 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28371 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28373 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28375 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28381 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28382 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28383 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28385 \begin_inset Flex URL
28388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28390 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28396 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881708
28400 \begin_layout Standard
28402 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885542
28404 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28405 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28406 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28408 It is quite established and mature, and there is a huge range of existing
28409 styles available, but it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to
28410 more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and
28412 Those are addressed by a rather new and ambitious approach,
28421 reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28422 (although it has been significantly
28423 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28430 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882543
28435 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28436 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28437 might conversely fail to correctly
28438 handle databases that use specific
28449 ), but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28453 \begin_layout Standard
28455 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882638
28456 Both approaches are described in turn.
28459 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28461 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28462 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28464 \begin_inset Index idx
28467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28469 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28470 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28481 \begin_layout Standard
28483 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882678
28485 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882681
28489 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882690
28490 via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28495 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28500 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28502 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882685
28506 \begin_inset space ~
28512 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28513 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28514 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882797
28515 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28525 Add bibliography to TOC
28527 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28532 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28533 in the document or just the cited references.
28536 \begin_layout Standard
28538 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882781
28539 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28542 style file is a text file with the file extension
28543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28554 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28555 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28556 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28557 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28559 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28565 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28566 \begin_inset Newline newline
28570 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28572 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28583 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883972
28584 In this document, we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28589 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28595 \begin_layout Standard
28596 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28597 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883993
28601 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28603 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883999
28605 \begin_inset Index idx
28608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28610 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884003
28611 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28619 \begin_layout Standard
28621 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884100
28622 Accessing a database via
28626 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28634 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28636 \begin_inset space ~
28642 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28643 In this window you can add one or more databases, but as opposed to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28645 you cannot select a
28649 file (we will explain later, why).
28650 As with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28653 Add bibliography to TOC
28655 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28660 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28661 in the document or just the cited references.
28664 \begin_layout Standard
28666 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884492
28671 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (a text file with
28673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28684 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like, and a citation style
28686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28697 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
28698 Usually, such style files come in pairs, and it makes most sense to use
28699 matching styles, but it is possible to mix any citation style with any
28700 bibliography style.
28703 \begin_layout Standard
28705 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891283
28710 styles are not set in the
28713 \begin_inset space ~
28724 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28725 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28729 However, in the former dialog (in the
28733 field which is only visible if you use
28737 ), you can enter options that change the way the bibliography is displayed
28738 (for instance concerning its heading).
28739 These options are detailed in the
28744 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28756 \begin_layout Standard
28758 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885667
28759 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
28760 \begin_inset space ~
28764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28766 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28776 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28778 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885726
28779 Bibliography Processors
28782 \begin_layout Standard
28783 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
28785 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
28786 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
28787 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
28792 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
28794 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
28798 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
28804 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
28805 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
28809 \begin_layout Standard
28811 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
28812 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
28814 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
28815 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
28816 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28821 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
28822 do this on a general level in
28824 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28825 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28826 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28829 , or for individual documents
28830 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
28831 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
28840 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28841 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28843 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
28848 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28849 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28850 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28856 The following variants are
28857 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
28859 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
28860 available by default
28865 \begin_layout Description
28867 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
28868 a specific, modern processor developed exclusively for
28872 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28880 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
28881 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
28882 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
28883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28887 \begin_inset space \space{}
28894 ), only with the package
28897 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
28900 and many specific features
28907 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
28908 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
28910 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
28915 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
28924 \begin_layout Description
28925 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
28926 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
28927 with all bibliography packages,
28928 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
28930 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
28934 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886476
28935 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
28936 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886506
28938 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
28944 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
28947 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
28952 \begin_layout Description
28953 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
28954 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
28955 (but no Unicode support)
28957 , larger memory than
28961 , works with all bibliography packages
28962 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
28963 , although more complex
28967 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
28971 features are supported.
28974 \begin_layout Standard
28976 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
28978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28985 bibliography processor set in
28987 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28988 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28999 bibliography processor in
29001 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29002 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29003 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29006 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29007 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29016 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29017 -based bibliography styles).
29018 This should suit most needs.
29023 \begin_layout Standard
29025 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29026 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29027 By default, this is
29035 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29036 You can adjust it in
29038 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29039 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29040 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29048 \begin_layout Standard
29050 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886683
29051 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29053 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331419
29054 Selected bibliography processors
29056 can be controlled with options that you can add below the
29057 \change_deleted -712698321 1484331437
29058 specification of the variants
29059 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331439
29063 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29065 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886810
29069 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886842
29072 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29074 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886842
29080 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886972
29082 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29090 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886836
29102 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887134
29106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29108 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887497
29114 \begin_layout Standard
29116 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29118 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29121 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29122 When you select the option
29124 Sectioned bibliography
29128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29129 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29132 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29136 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29138 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29142 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29146 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29149 are explained in detail in section
29151 Customizing Bibliographies
29155 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29157 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054457
29164 Additional Features
29169 \begin_layout Standard
29171 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29172 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29173 the two methods of creating them.
29174 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29175 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29176 We used the style file
29180 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29185 \begin_layout Subsection
29187 \begin_inset Index idx
29190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29191 Bibliography ! Citation format
29197 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881374
29199 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29201 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29210 \begin_layout Standard
29212 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29213 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29218 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29227 ) or author-year citations (as
29228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29237 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29241 \begin_layout Standard
29243 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29244 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29247 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29251 \begin_inset Index idx
29254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29256 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29257 Document ! Settings
29264 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29267 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29268 bibliography approach.
29271 \begin_layout Standard
29273 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29278 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29283 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29287 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29294 \begin_layout Standard
29296 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29297 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29305 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29313 Currently, the following options are available:
29316 \begin_layout Itemize
29318 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29325 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29329 \begin_layout Itemize
29331 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29340 package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29342 Biblatex citation style
29346 Biblatex bibliography style
29349 Many different style variants are supported.
29354 package can be entered in the
29361 \begin_layout Itemize
29363 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29366 Biblatex (natbib mode)
29373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29376 natbib compatibility mode
29377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29381 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29386 (see below) or want to emulate
29390 behavior very closely.
29395 , this option has some additional styles.
29396 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29401 styles are also supported by this variant.
29404 \begin_layout Itemize
29406 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29415 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29418 \begin_layout Itemize
29420 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29429 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29434 \begin_layout Standard
29436 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29445 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29447 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29452 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29454 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29455 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29472 , a suitable style is proposed).
29477 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29481 \begin_layout Standard
29483 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29484 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29486 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29488 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29491 n the citation reference dialog
29492 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29493 you can set a special citation format
29497 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29498 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29499 a name prefix such as
29500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29515 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29519 e., use or don't use
29520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29529 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29530 For this feature you need to enable the option
29536 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29540 \begin_inset Index idx
29543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29544 Document ! Settings
29554 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29555 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29556 style files as explained in
29557 the previous section.
29562 \begin_layout Standard
29564 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
29565 In the citation dialog,
29566 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
29568 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
29571 ou can also set text to appear
29572 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
29575 after a citation reference,
29576 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
29577 in the citation reference window
29578 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
29580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29584 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29602 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
29604 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
29607 example where the text
29608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29612 \begin_inset space ~
29616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29619 appears after the reference:
29622 \begin_layout Quote
29624 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29627 key "latexcompanion"
29633 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
29637 \begin_layout Standard
29639 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054733
29640 All styles except for
29644 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
29645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29653 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29657 \begin_layout Standard
29659 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998495
29660 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29661 That is to say, if you refer to multiple references at one, the prenote
29662 will precede the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the
29668 styles allow for adding pre- and postnotes to any individual reference
29669 in a multi-citation (so-called
29670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29673 qualified citation lists
29674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29680 If you use such a style, and if the current reference includes multiple
29682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29689 window will display three columns:
29690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29714 If you double-click on an item's
29715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29730 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29735 General text before
29736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29747 input widgets, you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29752 \begin_layout Section
29754 \begin_inset Index idx
29757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29773 \begin_layout Standard
29774 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29776 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29778 \begin_inset space ~
29783 or the toolbar button
29790 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29791 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29792 by \SpecialChar LyX
29793 as the index entry.
29796 \begin_layout Standard
29797 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29799 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29800 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29802 \begin_inset space ~
29808 A light blue box labeled
29809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29820 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29821 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29825 \begin_layout Standard
29826 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29827 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29828 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29829 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29831 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29833 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29841 \begin_layout Subsection
29842 Grouping Index Entries
29843 \begin_inset Index idx
29846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29855 \begin_layout Standard
29856 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29858 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29859 lists under the entry
29860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29868 First we create the entry
29869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29877 \begin_inset space ~
29881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29883 reference "subsec:Lists"
29888 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
29889 \begin_inset space ~
29893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29895 reference "sec:Itemize"
29899 , we insert the command
29902 \begin_layout Standard
29908 \begin_layout Standard
29912 \begin_layout Standard
29918 \begin_layout Standard
29919 for the enumerated list in section
29920 \begin_inset space ~
29924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29926 reference "sec:Enumerate"
29933 \begin_layout Standard
29934 The exclamation mark
29935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29942 marks the grouping levels.
29943 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
29944 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
29945 If we don't have an index entry for
29946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29953 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
29956 \begin_layout Subsection
29958 \begin_inset Index idx
29961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29962 Index ! Page ranges
29970 \begin_layout Standard
29971 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
29973 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
29974 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
29975 an index entry in section
29976 \begin_inset space ~
29980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29982 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
29989 \begin_layout Standard
29992 Paragraph environments|(
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 and another entry at the end of section
29997 \begin_inset space ~
30001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30003 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30010 \begin_layout Standard
30013 Paragraph environments|)
30016 \begin_layout Standard
30018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30041 respectively start and end the index range.
30042 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30043 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30044 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30045 An example is the index entry
30046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30049 Document ! Settings
30050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30056 \begin_layout Subsection
30058 \begin_inset Index idx
30061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30062 Index ! Cross referencing
30070 \begin_layout Standard
30071 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30072 We referred for example in the index entry
30073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30081 \begin_inset space ~
30085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30087 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30091 ) to the index entry
30092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30099 in the same section using the entry
30102 \begin_layout Standard
30105 GIF|see{Image formats}
30108 \begin_layout Standard
30109 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30111 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30112 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30115 \begin_layout Subsection
30117 \begin_inset Index idx
30120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30121 Index ! Entry order
30129 \begin_layout Standard
30130 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30131 follow the rules for the index order.
30132 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30138 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30140 \begin_inset space ~
30144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30146 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30155 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30156 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30181 \begin_inset Index idx
30184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30185 Dummy entries ! maïs
30191 \begin_inset Index idx
30194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30195 Dummy entries ! maître
30201 \begin_inset Index idx
30204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30205 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30210 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30211 maïs, maison, maître.
30212 To achieve this, we use the command
30215 \begin_layout Standard
30218 previous entry@current entry
30221 \begin_layout Standard
30222 In our case we want to have
30223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30238 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30241 \begin_layout Standard
30247 \begin_layout Standard
30248 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30249 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30251 See the next subsection for an example.
30254 \begin_layout Standard
30255 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30261 \begin_layout Standard
30262 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30267 to generate the index (see section
30268 \begin_inset space ~
30272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30274 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30283 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30284 -package aeguill in section
30285 \begin_inset space ~
30289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30291 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30295 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30296 -packages although all these index
30297 commands start with
30298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30311 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30316 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30319 \begin_layout Standard
30331 \begin_layout Standard
30343 \begin_layout Subsection
30345 \begin_inset Index idx
30348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30349 Index ! Entry layout
30357 \begin_layout Standard
30358 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30359 \begin_inset Index idx
30362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30365 This is an italic dummy entry
30370 You can also format the page number using the character
30371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30378 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30379 -command without a backslash.
30380 We can write for example
30383 \begin_layout Standard
30386 italic page number:|textit
30389 \begin_layout Standard
30390 to get the page number in italic.
30391 \begin_inset Index idx
30394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30395 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30400 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30401 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30419 \begin_inset space ~
30425 Have a look at section
30426 \begin_inset space ~
30430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30432 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30436 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30440 \begin_layout Standard
30441 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30449 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30453 to generate the index, see section
30454 \begin_inset space ~
30458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30460 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30469 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30474 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30475 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30478 key "latexcompanion"
30491 \begin_layout Standard
30492 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30494 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30495 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30496 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30497 If so, put the following in the preamble
30500 \begin_layout Standard
30512 \begin_layout Standard
30516 \begin_layout Standard
30522 \begin_layout Standard
30523 in the index entry.
30524 \begin_inset Index idx
30527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30528 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30533 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30534 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30535 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30538 \begin_layout Standard
30539 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30540 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30541 a bold font for all index entries.
30542 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30554 documentation for details,
30555 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30557 key "makeindex,xindy"
30565 \begin_layout Subsection
30567 \begin_inset Index idx
30570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30579 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30586 \begin_layout Standard
30587 If the index generation program
30591 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30592 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30596 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30597 distribution, is used.
30601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30606 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30607 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30608 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30609 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30610 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30620 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30622 dialog, see section
30623 \begin_inset space ~
30627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30629 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30634 The available options are listed and explained in
30635 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30637 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30643 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30647 \begin_layout Standard
30648 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30649 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30652 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30653 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30657 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30658 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30661 \begin_layout Subsection
30665 \begin_layout Standard
30666 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30667 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30675 next to the standard index.
30677 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30678 that add this feature.
30685 \begin_inset Index idx
30688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30690 -packages ! splitidx
30695 package to generate multiple indexes.
30696 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30702 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30704 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30712 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30713 style, but it also includes
30714 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30715 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30723 \begin_layout Standard
30724 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30725 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30727 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30728 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30731 and select the option
30733 Use multiple Indexes
30740 already contains the standard index
30741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30749 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30750 also appear as a heading) to the
30754 input field and press the
30759 The new index now also appears in the list.
30760 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30761 label color to the new index.
30764 \begin_layout Standard
30765 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30775 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30776 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30777 are additional features:
30780 \begin_layout Itemize
30781 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30782 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30785 \begin_layout Itemize
30786 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30787 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30795 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30796 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30797 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30798 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30801 \begin_layout Section
30802 Nomenclature/Glossary
30803 \begin_inset Index idx
30806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30813 \begin_inset Index idx
30816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30847 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30854 \begin_layout Standard
30855 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30856 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30857 called nomenclature or glossary.
30860 \begin_layout Standard
30861 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30868 \begin_inset Index idx
30871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30873 -packages ! nomencl
30879 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30881 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30888 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30892 \begin_layout Standard
30893 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30894 and then use the menu
30896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30902 \begin_inset space ~
30907 or the toolbar button
30910 arg "nomencl-insert"
30915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30926 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30929 \begin_layout Standard
30930 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30931 The first is the term or
30935 that you wish to define.
30940 of the term or symbol.
30943 \begin_layout Standard
30944 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30952 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
30953 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
30961 \begin_layout Subsection
30962 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
30963 \begin_inset Index idx
30966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30967 Nomenclature ! Layout
30975 \begin_layout Standard
30976 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
30980 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
30983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30987 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30995 \begin_inset Newline newline
31003 \begin_inset Newline newline
31009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31016 character starts/ends the formula.
31017 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31018 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31030 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31040 \begin_layout Standard
31041 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31042 -syntax is given in section
31043 \begin_inset space ~
31047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31049 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31056 \begin_layout Standard
31060 \begin_inset space ~
31065 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31067 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31072 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31079 in this document is:
31080 \begin_inset Newline newline
31085 dummy entry for the character
31090 \begin_inset Newline newline
31102 \begin_inset space ~
31112 font use the command
31141 \begin_layout Standard
31142 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31147 \begin_inset space \space{}
31151 \begin_inset Newline newline
31167 \begin_inset Newline newline
31170 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31171 This command will make the font of all symbols
31178 \begin_inset space ~
31186 \begin_layout Standard
31187 If the characters |
31188 \begin_inset space \space{}
31192 \begin_inset space \space{}
31196 \begin_inset space \space{}
31200 \begin_inset space \space{}
31204 \begin_inset space \space{}
31207 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31208 a quote character in front of them.
31209 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31210 LatexCommand nomenclature
31211 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31212 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31220 \begin_layout Subsection
31221 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31222 \begin_inset Index idx
31225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31226 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31234 \begin_layout Standard
31235 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31236 -code of the symbol
31238 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31240 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31243 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31244 LatexCommand nomenclature
31246 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31254 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31258 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31259 LatexCommand nomenclature
31262 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31268 They will be sorted by
31269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31295 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31298 will be sorted before the
31302 since the character
31303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31310 is considered in sorting.
31313 \begin_layout Standard
31314 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31317 \begin_inset space ~
31322 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31323 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31325 For the example given, you can insert
31329 in this field for the
31330 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31337 will be located before
31338 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31344 \begin_layout Standard
31345 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31350 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31360 \begin_layout Subsection
31361 Nomenclature Options
31362 \begin_inset Index idx
31365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31366 Nomenclature ! Options
31374 \begin_layout Standard
31379 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31380 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31383 \begin_layout Description
31384 refeq Appends the phrase
31385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31400 to every nomenclature entry, where
31406 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31409 \begin_layout Description
31410 refpage Appends the phrase
31411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31426 to every nomenclature entry, where
31432 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31435 \begin_layout Description
31436 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31439 \begin_layout Standard
31440 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31441 class options list in the
31443 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31447 In this document the options
31454 \begin_layout Standard
31455 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31461 \begin_layout Standard
31462 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31463 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31468 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31471 \begin_layout Description
31481 \begin_layout Description
31484 nomrefpage Like the
31491 \begin_layout Description
31494 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31503 \begin_layout Description
31507 \begin_inset space ~
31513 \begin_inset space ~
31518 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31521 \begin_layout Standard
31523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31530 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31531 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31535 \begin_layout Standard
31543 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31546 \begin_inset Newline newline
31553 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31558 \begin_inset Newline newline
31562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31577 by their translation.
31580 \begin_layout Subsection
31581 Printing the Nomenclature
31582 \begin_inset Index idx
31585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31586 Nomenclature ! Printing
31594 \begin_layout Standard
31595 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31597 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31598 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31614 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31615 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31616 You can choose between these settings:
31619 \begin_layout Description
31620 Default a space of 1
31621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31627 \begin_layout Description
31629 \begin_inset space ~
31633 \begin_inset space ~
31636 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31639 \begin_layout Description
31640 Custom custom space
31643 \begin_layout Standard
31644 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31653 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31661 For example, in order to change the name to
31665 , add the following line to the preamble:
31668 \begin_layout Standard
31676 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31679 \begin_layout Subsection
31680 Nomenclature Program
31681 \begin_inset Index idx
31684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31685 Nomenclature ! Program
31691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31693 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31700 \begin_layout Standard
31706 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31707 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31709 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31714 by adding options, see section
31715 \begin_inset space ~
31719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31721 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31726 The available options are listed and explained in
31727 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31729 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31737 \begin_layout Section
31739 \begin_inset Index idx
31742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31749 \begin_inset Index idx
31752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31753 Document ! Branches
31759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31761 name "sec:Branches"
31768 \begin_layout Standard
31769 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31770 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31771 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31772 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31775 \begin_layout Standard
31776 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31777 allows you to put text into branches.
31778 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31779 To create a branch, either select the menu
31781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31782 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31785 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31787 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31794 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31795 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31796 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31797 and whether the name of the branch should
31798 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31799 (see below for an example).
31800 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31801 to the name of the other) and to add
31802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31814 \begin_inset space ~
31817 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31818 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31821 \begin_layout Standard
31822 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31823 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31825 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31828 where you can choose a branch.
31829 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31833 \begin_layout Standard
31834 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31835 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31838 \begin_layout Standard
31839 \begin_inset Branch Question
31843 \begin_layout Standard
31848 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31856 \begin_layout Standard
31857 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31861 \begin_layout Standard
31866 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31874 \begin_layout Standard
31881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31882 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31885 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31886 Consider for example a file
31887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31894 which has the above branches.
31896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31903 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31927 branch were inactive,
31928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31943 branch was active, likewise
31944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31959 branch was active, and
31960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31963 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
31964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31967 if both branches were active.
31968 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
31969 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31975 \begin_layout Standard
31976 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
31982 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
31983 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
31987 \begin_inset space ~
31995 \begin_layout Standard
31996 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32000 \begin_layout Standard
32006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32013 branch is deactivated.
32019 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32025 \begin_layout Standard
32026 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32027 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32028 definitions for each branch.
32029 For example you can define for the question branch
32033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32034 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32035 -syntax, see section
32036 \begin_inset space ~
32040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32042 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32054 \begin_layout Standard
32064 \begin_layout Standard
32074 \begin_layout Standard
32075 and for the answer branch
32078 \begin_layout Standard
32088 \begin_layout Standard
32098 \begin_layout Standard
32099 \begin_inset Branch Question
32103 \begin_layout Standard
32107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32135 \begin_layout Standard
32136 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32140 \begin_layout Standard
32144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32172 \begin_layout Standard
32173 Now it is possible to use the
32177 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32184 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32187 commands to obtain conditional output.
32188 Here is an example formula where only the
32195 \begin_inset Formula
32197 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32205 \begin_layout Standard
32206 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32214 \begin_layout Standard
32215 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32221 \begin_inset space \space{}
32224 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32226 For this advanced usage, see the
32232 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32237 \begin_layout Section
32239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32241 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32246 \begin_inset Index idx
32249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32258 \begin_layout Standard
32261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32262 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32265 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32267 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32273 \begin_inset Index idx
32276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32278 -packages ! hyperref
32283 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32284 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32285 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32286 part of the document.
32290 \begin_layout Standard
32291 The header information in the dialog tab
32295 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32296 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32297 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32298 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32302 \begin_inset space ~
32306 \begin_inset space ~
32311 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32312 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32313 and author entries.
32317 \begin_inset space ~
32321 \begin_inset space ~
32325 \begin_inset space ~
32330 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32333 \begin_layout Standard
32334 You can specify in the dialog tab
32338 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32343 \begin_inset space ~
32347 \begin_inset space ~
32351 \begin_inset space ~
32356 option allows long links to be split;
32359 \begin_inset space ~
32363 \begin_inset space ~
32367 \begin_inset space ~
32375 \begin_inset space ~
32380 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32383 \begin_inset space ~
32388 colors the different links.
32389 The default colors are:
32392 \begin_layout Labeling
32393 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32398 for hyperlinks and URLs
32401 \begin_layout Labeling
32402 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32410 \begin_layout Labeling
32411 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32419 \begin_layout Standard
32420 but you can change these in the field
32425 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32428 \begin_layout Standard
32431 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32434 \begin_layout Standard
32439 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32440 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32441 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32444 \begin_layout Standard
32449 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32450 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32451 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32461 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32462 when opening the PDF.
32464 \begin_inset space ~
32467 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32468 \begin_inset space ~
32471 1 will only display the sections.
32474 \begin_layout Standard
32475 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32476 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32482 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32483 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32493 \begin_layout Section
32495 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32499 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32506 \begin_layout Subsection
32509 \begin_inset Index idx
32512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32522 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32529 \begin_layout Standard
32530 As \SpecialChar LyX
32531 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32532 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32533 commands and constructs,
32536 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32537 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32538 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32539 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32540 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32541 cannot support all packages and
32545 \begin_layout Standard
32546 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32547 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32548 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32552 Code box is created by the menu
32554 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32556 \begin_inset space ~
32561 or by the toolbar button
32574 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32582 \begin_layout Standard
32583 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32585 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32587 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32592 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32597 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32604 , you can write the command part
32610 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32611 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32615 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32616 Code box behind the word.
32617 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32618 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32622 \begin_layout Standard
32623 \begin_inset Graphics
32624 filename clipart/ERT.png
32632 \begin_layout Standard
32636 \begin_layout Standard
32637 This is a line with a
32641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32664 \begin_layout Standard
32665 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32673 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32674 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32675 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32676 know that the command is finished.
32684 \begin_layout Subsection
32685 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32687 \begin_inset Argument 1
32690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32691 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32698 \begin_inset Index idx
32701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32711 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32718 \begin_layout Standard
32719 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32720 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32721 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32722 uses in the background.
32723 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32724 is based on commands, you can
32725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32733 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32734 any time if you know the right commands.
32735 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32736 is the end of the day.
32737 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32738 all caption labels bold.
32739 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32741 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32745 \begin_layout Standard
32746 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32748 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32750 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32753 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32763 \begin_layout Standard
32764 As result you find that the package
32769 \begin_inset Index idx
32772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32774 -packages ! caption
32780 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32782 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32785 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32789 \begin_inset space ~
32797 \begin_layout Standard
32802 usepackage[options]{package name}
32805 \begin_layout Standard
32806 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32807 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32808 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32809 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32812 \begin_layout Standard
32813 In your case the package name is
32818 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32823 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32824 So you add the command
32827 \begin_layout Standard
32832 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32835 \begin_layout Standard
32836 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32841 For more commands provided by the
32845 package, have a look at its documentation,
32846 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32861 \begin_layout Standard
32862 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32864 For example if you use a
32868 class, you don't need the package
32872 , you can instead write
32875 \begin_layout Standard
32880 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32885 \begin_layout Standard
32886 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32887 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32888 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32895 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32898 \begin_layout Standard
32899 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32900 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32902 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32903 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32904 Code box as described in the previous
32908 \begin_layout Standard
32909 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32910 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32913 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32915 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
32923 \begin_layout Standard
32924 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32930 \begin_layout Standard
32934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32944 \begin_inset Note Note
32947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32948 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
32956 \begin_layout Left Header
32957 \begin_inset Argument 1
32960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32980 \begin_inset Note Note
32983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32984 defines the header line as described below
32992 \begin_layout Center Header
32993 \begin_inset Argument 1
32996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33005 \begin_layout Right Header
33006 \begin_inset Argument 1
33009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33030 \begin_layout Left Footer
33031 \begin_inset Argument 1
33034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33055 \begin_layout Center Footer
33056 \begin_inset Argument 1
33059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33071 \begin_inset Newline newline
33075 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33081 \begin_layout Right Footer
33082 \begin_inset Argument 1
33085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33107 \begin_layout Section
33108 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33111 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33116 \begin_inset Index idx
33119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33120 Document ! Header/Footer line
33126 \begin_inset Index idx
33129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33138 \begin_layout Standard
33139 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33143 \begin_inset space ~
33154 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33160 \begin_inset space ~
33166 As a second step add in the menu
33168 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33169 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33178 Custom Header/Footerlines
33181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33185 This module offers the following 6
33186 \begin_inset space ~
33192 \begin_layout Description
33194 \begin_inset space ~
33198 \begin_inset space ~
33202 \begin_inset space ~
33206 \begin_inset space ~
33210 \begin_inset space ~
33216 \begin_layout Description
33218 \begin_inset space ~
33222 \begin_inset space ~
33226 \begin_inset space ~
33230 \begin_inset space ~
33234 \begin_inset space ~
33240 \begin_layout Standard
33241 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33242 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33245 \begin_layout Standard
33246 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33247 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33249 \begin_inset space ~
33253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33255 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33259 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33262 \begin_layout Standard
33263 \begin_inset Float figure
33269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33272 \begin_inset Tabular
33273 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33274 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33275 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33276 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33277 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33279 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33297 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33308 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33326 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33337 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33341 The normal text on the page goes here.
33342 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33344 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33345 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33350 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33359 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33370 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33388 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33399 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33417 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33435 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33440 name "fig:Page-layout"
33444 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33457 \begin_layout Standard
33458 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33466 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33470 \begin_inset space ~
33475 is set to “Default”.
33476 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33485 \begin_layout Subsection
33489 \begin_layout Standard
33490 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33491 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33492 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33493 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33495 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33497 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33500 \begin_layout Standard
33501 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33502 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33508 \begin_inset space ~
33516 \begin_layout Description
33519 thepage prints the current page number
33522 \begin_layout Description
33525 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33528 \begin_layout Description
33531 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33534 \begin_layout Description
33537 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33538 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33545 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33548 because it usually goes in a left header.
33551 \begin_layout Description
33554 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33555 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33557 It is normally used in the right header.
33560 \begin_layout Subsection
33561 Default header/footer
33564 \begin_layout Standard
33565 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33566 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33567 footer has the page number.
33568 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33569 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33570 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33573 \begin_inset space ~
33581 \begin_layout Subsection
33585 \begin_layout Standard
33586 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33587 Some pages are different.
33588 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33589 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33590 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33591 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33592 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33596 Header and footer decoration line
33599 \begin_layout Standard
33600 By default, you get a 0.4
33601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33604 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33605 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33617 in the following way:
33620 \begin_layout Standard
33627 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33630 \begin_layout Standard
33631 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33644 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33651 \begin_layout Standard
33652 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33654 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33655 \begin_inset space ~
33659 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33670 Several header/footer lines
33673 \begin_layout Standard
33674 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33675 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33676 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33678 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33693 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33694 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33696 \begin_inset space ~
33704 \begin_layout Standard
33711 headheight}{height}
33714 \begin_layout Standard
33719 is a size in standard units (e.
33720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33724 \begin_inset space \space{}
33732 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33733 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33734 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33735 logfile with the menu
33737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33739 \begin_inset space ~
33747 \begin_inset space ~
33752 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33757 \begin_inset Index idx
33760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33762 -packages ! fancyhdr
33768 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33769 for your header/footer.
33772 \begin_layout Subsection
33776 \begin_layout Standard
33777 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33778 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33779 This example consists of the following definition:
33782 \begin_layout Description
33784 \begin_inset space ~
33793 , empty optional argument
33796 \begin_layout Description
33798 \begin_inset space ~
33801 Header empty, empty optional argument
33804 \begin_layout Description
33806 \begin_inset space ~
33815 in the optional argument
33818 \begin_layout Description
33820 \begin_inset space ~
33829 in the optional argument
33832 \begin_layout Description
33834 \begin_inset space ~
33847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33851 \begin_inset Newline newline
33855 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33862 in the optional argument
33865 \begin_layout Description
33867 \begin_inset space ~
33876 , empty optional argument
33879 \begin_layout Description
33882 headrulewidth set to 2
33883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33889 \begin_layout Standard
33890 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33891 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33897 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33907 \begin_layout Standard
33908 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33914 \begin_layout Standard
33918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33922 pagestyle{headings}
33928 \begin_inset Note Note
33931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33932 switches back to page style with the default headings
33940 \begin_layout Section
33941 Previewing Snippets of your Document
33942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33944 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
33949 \begin_inset Index idx
33952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33959 \begin_inset Index idx
33962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33971 \begin_layout Standard
33973 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
33974 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
33975 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
33978 \begin_layout Subsection
33982 \begin_layout Standard
33983 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33989 \begin_inset Index idx
33992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33994 -packages ! preview-latex
33999 (on some systems named simply
34004 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34013 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34015 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34023 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34024 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34025 -package are automatically
34026 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34030 \begin_layout Subsection
34034 \begin_layout Standard
34035 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34036 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34038 activate the option
34041 \begin_inset space ~
34048 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34054 \begin_inset space ~
34058 \begin_inset space ~
34061 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34068 \begin_inset space ~
34081 \begin_inset space ~
34086 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34089 \begin_layout Standard
34090 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34095 \begin_inset space ~
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34111 \begin_layout Standard
34112 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34113 and when you finish
34117 \begin_layout Standard
34118 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34126 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34127 generated by activating the option
34130 \begin_inset space ~
34136 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34144 \begin_layout Subsection
34145 Selected document parts
34148 \begin_layout Standard
34149 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34150 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34151 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34152 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34154 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34160 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34161 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34162 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34165 \begin_layout Standard
34166 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34173 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34185 is explained in section
34187 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34192 \begin_inset space ~
34202 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34203 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34204 the final rotated boxes,
34205 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34206 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34208 Here is the result:
34211 \begin_layout Standard
34212 \begin_inset Preview
34214 \begin_layout Standard
34219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34223 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34229 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34239 height_special "totalheight"
34244 backgroundcolor "none"
34247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34272 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34278 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34300 \begin_layout Standard
34301 Previewing works also for colors.
34302 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34321 is explained in section
34328 \begin_inset space ~
34341 \begin_layout Standard
34342 \begin_inset Preview
34344 \begin_layout Standard
34348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34367 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34372 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34391 \begin_layout Standard
34392 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34398 \begin_layout Standard
34399 If \SpecialChar LyX
34400 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34401 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34402 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34403 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34404 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34405 the \SpecialChar TeX
34407 If \SpecialChar LyX
34408 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34409 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34411 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34412 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34413 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34416 \begin_layout Subsection
34421 \begin_layout Standard
34422 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34423 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34426 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34428 \begin_inset space ~
34433 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34435 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34437 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34438 's main window, then only this selection
34439 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34440 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34441 the source view window.
34446 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34447 ; but note that if you have
34448 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34450 not just the one which is open at the time.
34453 \begin_layout Section
34454 Advanced Find and Replace
34455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34457 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34462 \begin_inset Index idx
34465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34472 \begin_inset Index idx
34475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34484 \begin_layout Subsection
34488 \begin_layout Standard
34489 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34490 allows for searching of complex,
34491 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34493 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34494 The key-features are:
34497 \begin_layout Itemize
34498 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34499 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34500 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34504 \begin_layout Itemize
34505 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34506 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34507 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34508 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34511 \begin_layout Itemize
34512 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34513 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34514 outside of mathematics environments
34517 \begin_layout Itemize
34518 Search may be widened to a specific
34523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34527 \begin_inset space ~
34530 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34531 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34538 \begin_layout Itemize
34539 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34540 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34545 \begin_inset space ~
34548 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34551 \begin_layout Subsection
34555 \begin_layout Standard
34556 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34558 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34571 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34574 ) or the toolbar button
34577 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34583 Advanced Find and Replace
34588 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34592 \begin_layout Standard
34598 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34602 \begin_inset space ~
34607 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34610 arg "paragraph-break"
34614 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34615 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34619 arg "paragraph-break"
34622 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34626 searches backwards.
34629 \begin_layout Standard
34633 \begin_inset space ~
34638 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34647 \begin_inset space ~
34652 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34655 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34656 Searching for mathematics
34659 \begin_layout Standard
34660 Mathematical formulas, such as
34661 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34664 or something more complex like
34665 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34668 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34673 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34674 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34675 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34676 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34686 \begin_layout Standard
34687 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34688 This is done by switching to the
34692 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34697 This way, entering in the
34704 \begin_layout Itemize
34705 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34706 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34709 \begin_layout Itemize
34710 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34711 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34714 \begin_layout Itemize
34715 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34716 of it only within section headings.
34717 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34718 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34722 \begin_layout Itemize
34723 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34724 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34727 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34731 \begin_layout Standard
34732 The entries made in the
34736 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34739 \begin_inset space ~
34745 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34749 button or alternatively press
34752 arg "paragraph-break"
34759 while the cursor is in the
34762 \begin_inset space ~
34770 \begin_layout Standard
34771 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34773 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34777 \begin_layout Itemize
34778 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34779 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34787 with its typewriter version
34788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34802 \begin_layout Itemize
34803 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34809 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34821 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34828 (you may want to enable the
34831 \begin_inset space ~
34839 \begin_inset space ~
34844 options and disable the
34852 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34860 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34861 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34865 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34868 , or occurrences of
34869 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34873 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34879 \begin_layout Subsection
34883 \begin_layout Standard
34884 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34889 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34891 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34893 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34903 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34909 This is done with the context menu
34911 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34912 Insert Regular Expression
34914 while the cursor is in the
34919 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
34920 expression matching rules
34924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34925 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
34928 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34932 \begin_inset space ~
34935 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
34936 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
34942 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
34943 same text in the document.
34944 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
34945 Examples of using such a feature may be:
34948 \begin_layout Enumerate
34949 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
34954 editor the fraction
34955 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
34959 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34962 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
34963 fractions with the given denominator.
34966 \begin_layout Enumerate
34967 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
34979 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34984 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
34985 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
34986 Also, by inserting a
34987 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34990 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
34991 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
34994 \begin_layout Standard
34995 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
34996 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
34997 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35000 , and referring back to them through
35001 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35005 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35009 For example, try searching with the regexp
35010 \begin_inset Newline newline
35013 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35016 \begin_inset Newline newline
35019 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35022 \begin_layout Standard
35023 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35026 \begin_layout Standard
35027 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35035 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35036 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35037 sub-expressions is absolute.
35039 \begin_inset space ~
35043 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35046 always refers to the first occurrence of
35047 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35050 in all entered regexps.
35058 \begin_layout Section
35060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35062 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35067 \begin_inset Index idx
35070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35079 \begin_layout Standard
35081 has a built-in spell checker.
35084 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35091 key or the toolbar button
35094 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35097 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35098 beginning of the currently selected text.
35099 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35100 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35101 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35102 scrolled so that it is visible.
35103 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35104 n, if any could be found.
35105 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35109 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35110 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35113 \begin_layout Standard
35114 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35121 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35122 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35124 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35125 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35128 \begin_inset space ~
35136 arg "dialog-show character"
35139 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35141 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35144 \begin_layout Standard
35145 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35146 can be downloaded from here:
35147 \begin_inset Newline newline
35151 \begin_inset Flex URL
35154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35156 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35162 \begin_inset Newline newline
35166 \begin_inset space ~
35169 files for each language.
35170 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35171 \begin_inset space ~
35174 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35175 's installation subfolder
35183 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35185 \begin_inset Newline newline
35188 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35189 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35190 but in most cases these are
35206 is the language code.
35209 \begin_layout Subsection
35213 \begin_layout Standard
35216 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35217 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35219 \begin_inset space ~
35222 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35225 you can set the following things:
35228 \begin_layout Description
35230 \begin_inset space ~
35233 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35234 should use for spell checking.
35235 Depending on your platform,
35249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35250 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35251 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35266 \begin_inset space ~
35269 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35272 \begin_layout Description
35274 \begin_inset space ~
35277 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35278 will always use the given language
35279 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35282 \begin_layout Description
35284 \begin_inset space ~
35287 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35293 \begin_inset space \space{}
35297 This should normally not be needed.
35300 \begin_layout Description
35302 \begin_inset space ~
35306 \begin_inset space ~
35309 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35321 \begin_layout Description
35323 \begin_inset space ~
35326 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35327 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35328 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35329 appear in a context menu.
35330 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35334 \begin_layout Description
35336 \begin_inset space ~
35340 \begin_inset space ~
35344 \begin_inset space ~
35347 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35351 \begin_layout Section
35353 \begin_inset Index idx
35356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35365 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35372 \begin_layout Standard
35374 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35375 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35385 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35387 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35397 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35399 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35400 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35401 which are available for many languages.
35404 \begin_layout Standard
35405 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35406 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35410 \begin_layout Subsection
35411 Setting up the thesaurus
35414 \begin_layout Standard
35423 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35427 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35432 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35434 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35438 \begin_inset space ~
35446 For instance, the US English files are named:
35449 \begin_layout Itemize
35453 \begin_layout Itemize
35457 \begin_layout Standard
35466 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35467 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35470 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35471 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35472 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35474 \begin_inset space ~
35479 ) to the path where they are installed.
35483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35484 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35485 ies, typical locations are
35491 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35495 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35499 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35502 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35508 LibreOffice-<Version>
35515 On the Mac, the default location is
35517 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35518 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35519 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35520 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35521 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35522 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35530 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35531 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35532 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35536 \begin_layout Standard
35537 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35538 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35542 \begin_layout Itemize
35543 \begin_inset Flex URL
35546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35548 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35556 \begin_layout Standard
35557 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35558 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35560 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35561 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35562 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35564 \begin_inset space ~
35569 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35571 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35572 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35576 \begin_layout Standard
35577 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35579 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35582 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35588 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35591 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35592 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35600 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35601 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35602 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35604 \begin_inset space ~
35609 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35612 \begin_layout Subsection
35613 Using the thesaurus
35616 \begin_layout Standard
35617 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35619 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35622 or the toolbar button
35625 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35628 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35630 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35632 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35633 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35634 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35643 ), related terms (such as
35646 \begin_inset space ~
35655 ), compounds (such as
35658 \begin_inset space ~
35667 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35676 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35679 \begin_layout Standard
35680 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35681 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35685 \begin_layout Standard
35686 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35687 the dictionary, such as the above
35691 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35696 \begin_inset space \space{}
35699 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35700 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35701 For example, looking up the word form
35705 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35710 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35715 \begin_inset space \space{}
35726 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35727 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35728 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35731 \begin_layout Section
35733 \begin_inset Index idx
35736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35743 \begin_inset Index idx
35746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35747 Document ! Change Tracking
35753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35755 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35762 \begin_layout Standard
35763 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35764 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35765 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35766 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35768 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35770 \begin_inset space ~
35773 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35775 \begin_inset space ~
35783 \begin_layout Standard
35784 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35798 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35799 You can change the color in
35801 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35802 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35808 \begin_inset space ~
35813 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35819 \begin_inset Index idx
35822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35823 Color ! Change tracking
35828 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35829 's status bar when the
35830 cursor is in changed text.
35831 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35834 arg "changes-merge"
35840 \begin_layout Standard
35841 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35843 \begin_inset Index idx
35846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35855 \begin_layout Standard
35856 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35862 \begin_layout Standard
35863 \begin_inset Graphics
35864 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35872 \begin_layout Standard
35873 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35879 \begin_layout Standard
35880 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35883 \begin_layout Standard
35884 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35890 \begin_layout Standard
35891 \begin_inset Tabular
35892 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35893 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35894 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35895 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35896 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35905 arg "changes-track"
35913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35919 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35921 \begin_inset space ~
35924 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35926 \begin_inset space ~
35935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35944 arg "changes-output"
35952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35960 \begin_inset space ~
35963 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35965 \begin_inset space ~
35969 \begin_inset space ~
35973 \begin_inset space ~
35982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36003 Jumps to the next change
36009 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36018 arg "change-accept"
36026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36032 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36034 \begin_inset space ~
36037 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36039 \begin_inset space ~
36048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36057 arg "change-reject"
36065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36071 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36073 \begin_inset space ~
36076 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36078 \begin_inset space ~
36087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36096 arg "changes-merge"
36104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36110 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36112 \begin_inset space ~
36115 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36117 \begin_inset space ~
36126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36135 arg "all-changes-accept"
36143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36149 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36151 \begin_inset space ~
36154 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36156 \begin_inset space ~
36160 \begin_inset space ~
36169 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36178 arg "all-changes-reject"
36186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36192 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36194 \begin_inset space ~
36197 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36199 \begin_inset space ~
36203 \begin_inset space ~
36212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36236 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36270 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36272 \begin_inset space ~
36288 \begin_layout Standard
36289 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36295 \begin_layout Standard
36296 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36316 \begin_layout Standard
36317 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36318 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36319 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36320 the next change after the current cursor position.
36321 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36322 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36323 step to the next change.
36324 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36327 \begin_layout Standard
36328 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36329 to describe a change.
36332 \begin_layout Standard
36333 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36339 \begin_inset Index idx
36342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36344 -packages ! dvipost
36350 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36352 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36359 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36363 \begin_layout Section
36364 Comparison of Documents
36365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36367 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36372 \begin_inset Index idx
36375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36376 Comparison of documents
36384 \begin_layout Standard
36385 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36388 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36392 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36393 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36395 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36397 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36401 \begin_inset space ~
36405 \begin_inset space ~
36409 \begin_inset space ~
36418 \begin_inset space ~
36422 \begin_inset space ~
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36434 \begin_inset space ~
36438 \begin_inset space ~
36443 enables the change tracking option
36446 \begin_inset space ~
36450 \begin_inset space ~
36454 \begin_inset space ~
36459 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36462 \begin_layout Section
36463 International Support
36464 \begin_inset Index idx
36467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36468 International support
36476 \begin_layout Standard
36477 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36478 with any language you want.
36479 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36480 up \SpecialChar LyX
36482 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36484 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36492 \begin_layout Standard
36493 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36494 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36495 \begin_inset space ~
36499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36501 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36508 \begin_layout Subsection
36510 \begin_inset Index idx
36513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36520 \begin_inset Index idx
36523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36524 Document ! Settings
36530 \begin_inset Index idx
36533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36534 Document ! Language
36542 \begin_layout Standard
36545 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36546 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36549 dialog lets you set
36551 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36556 \begin_layout Standard
36561 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36566 \begin_inset space ~
36571 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36572 For details about the different encoding options see section
36573 \begin_inset space ~
36577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36579 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36586 \begin_layout Subsection
36587 Keyboard mapping configuration
36588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36590 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36597 \begin_layout Standard
36598 If you have for example a U.
36599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36602 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36603 can use an alternate keymap.
36604 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36609 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36610 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36611 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36614 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36615 \begin_inset space ~
36619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36621 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36626 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36627 which one you want to use.
36630 \begin_layout Standard
36631 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36632 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36633 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36637 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36638 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36639 one to support the characters you want.
36640 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36647 \begin_layout Chapter
36650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36652 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36659 \begin_layout Standard
36660 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36661 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36662 topic inside the user's guide.
36665 \begin_layout Section
36667 \begin_inset Index idx
36670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36679 \begin_layout Standard
36684 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36687 \begin_layout Subsection
36691 \begin_layout Standard
36692 Creates a new document.
36695 \begin_layout Subsection
36699 \begin_layout Standard
36700 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36701 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36702 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36705 \begin_layout Subsection
36709 \begin_layout Standard
36713 \begin_layout Subsection
36717 \begin_layout Standard
36718 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36719 Click there on a file to open it.
36722 \begin_layout Subsection
36726 \begin_layout Standard
36727 Closes the current document.
36730 \begin_layout Subsection
36734 \begin_layout Standard
36735 Closes all opened documents.
36738 \begin_layout Subsection
36742 \begin_layout Standard
36743 Saves the actual document.
36746 \begin_layout Subsection
36750 \begin_layout Standard
36751 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36754 \begin_layout Subsection
36758 \begin_layout Standard
36759 Saves all opened documents.
36762 \begin_layout Subsection
36766 \begin_layout Standard
36767 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36770 \begin_layout Subsection
36774 \begin_layout Standard
36775 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36776 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36777 It is described in the section
36779 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36784 Additional Features
36789 \begin_layout Subsection
36793 \begin_layout Standard
36794 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36795 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36797 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36798 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36802 \begin_layout Standard
36803 When using the menu entry
36806 \begin_inset space ~
36811 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36815 \begin_inset space ~
36819 \begin_inset space ~
36823 \begin_inset space ~
36828 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36829 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36832 \begin_layout Subsection
36834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36836 name "subsec:Export"
36843 \begin_layout Standard
36844 You can export your document to various file formats.
36845 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36847 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36848 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36849 during its configuration.
36852 \begin_layout Standard
36853 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36855 \begin_inset space ~
36859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36861 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36868 \begin_layout Description
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36877 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36879 \begin_inset space ~
36882 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36883 \begin_inset Newline newline
36886 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36887 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36891 \begin_layout Description
36892 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36898 \begin_layout Description
36900 \begin_inset space ~
36903 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36909 \begin_layout Description
36910 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36911 's native DVI-format.
36912 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36913 files paths or file names in your document.
36915 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
36922 \begin_layout Description
36923 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
36924 in files paths or file names
36927 \begin_layout Description
36929 \begin_inset space ~
36936 ) DVI-format using the program
36938 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36941 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
36945 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36953 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
36961 \begin_layout Description
36963 \begin_inset space ~
36966 (cropped) the same as
36970 but with cropped page margins.
36973 \begin_layout Description
36975 \begin_inset space ~
36978 Dot text file with code in the programming language
36982 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
36987 \begin_layout Description
36991 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36999 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37007 \begin_layout Description
37009 \begin_inset space ~
37013 \begin_inset space ~
37016 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37020 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37028 \begin_layout Description
37032 \begin_inset space ~
37041 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37042 source that is compilable with the program
37044 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37048 \begin_layout Description
37052 \begin_inset space ~
37057 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37058 source, additionally all images used in the document
37059 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37063 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37066 \begin_layout Description
37070 \begin_inset space ~
37075 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37076 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37077 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37085 \begin_layout Description
37089 \begin_inset space ~
37098 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37099 source that is compilable with the program
37105 \begin_layout Description
37107 \begin_inset space ~
37111 \begin_inset space ~
37118 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37119 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37125 \begin_layout Description
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37130 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37131 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37137 \begin_inset space \space{}
37142 \begin_inset space ~
37146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37161 represent the version number)
37164 \begin_layout Description
37166 \begin_inset space ~
37170 \begin_inset space ~
37173 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37174 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37175 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37179 \begin_layout Description
37180 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37181 's internal XHTML engine
37184 \begin_layout Description
37186 \begin_inset space ~
37190 \begin_inset space ~
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37198 \begin_inset space ~
37201 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37206 For the conversion the program
37215 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37218 \begin_layout Description
37219 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37224 \begin_layout Description
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37229 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37231 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37234 For the conversion the program
37243 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37246 \begin_layout Description
37248 \begin_inset space ~
37251 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37252 For the conversion the program
37261 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37264 \begin_layout Description
37266 \begin_inset space ~
37269 (cropped) the same as
37272 \begin_inset space ~
37277 but with cropped page margins
37280 \begin_layout Description
37284 \begin_inset space ~
37289 PDF-format using the program
37293 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37296 \begin_layout Description
37300 \begin_inset space ~
37304 \begin_inset space ~
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37317 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37322 \begin_inset space \space{}
37325 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37329 \begin_layout Description
37333 \begin_inset space ~
37338 PDF-format using the program
37340 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37343 , produces PDF-files directly
37346 \begin_layout Description
37350 \begin_inset space ~
37355 PDF-format using the program
37359 , produces PDF-files directly
37362 \begin_layout Description
37366 \begin_inset space ~
37371 PDF-format using the program
37375 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37378 \begin_layout Description
37382 \begin_inset space ~
37387 PDF-format using the program
37392 , produces PDF-files directly
37395 \begin_layout Description
37399 \begin_inset space ~
37407 \begin_layout Description
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37420 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37421 and then exported as text using the program
37426 \begin_layout Description
37431 PostScript format using the program
37439 options see section
37440 \begin_inset space ~
37444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37446 reference "subsec:General-output"
37453 \begin_layout Description
37454 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37455 source and also code in the statistical programming
37469 it is possible to use
37473 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37477 \begin_layout Standard
37478 If one of the menu entries
37485 \begin_inset space ~
37494 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37496 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37498 \begin_inset space ~
37502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37504 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37509 \begin_inset Index idx
37512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37513 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37522 \begin_layout Subsection
37526 \begin_layout Standard
37527 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37528 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37531 \begin_inset space ~
37535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37537 reference "sec:Paths"
37542 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37551 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37552 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37553 's preferences as described in section
37554 \begin_inset space ~
37558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37560 reference "subsec:Converters"
37567 \begin_layout Subsection
37568 New and Close Window
37571 \begin_layout Standard
37572 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37576 \begin_layout Subsection
37580 \begin_layout Standard
37581 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37584 \begin_layout Section
37586 \begin_inset Index idx
37589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37598 \begin_layout Subsection
37602 \begin_layout Standard
37603 Described in section
37604 \begin_inset space ~
37608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37610 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37617 \begin_layout Subsection
37618 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37621 \begin_layout Standard
37622 Described in section
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37629 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37636 \begin_layout Subsection
37640 \begin_layout Standard
37641 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37642 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37645 \begin_layout Subsection
37649 \begin_layout Standard
37650 Selects the whole document.
37653 \begin_layout Subsection
37654 Find & Replace (Quick)
37657 \begin_layout Standard
37658 Described in section
37659 \begin_inset space ~
37663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37665 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37672 \begin_layout Subsection
37673 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37676 \begin_layout Standard
37677 Described in section
37678 \begin_inset space ~
37682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37684 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37691 \begin_layout Subsection
37692 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37695 \begin_layout Standard
37696 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37700 \begin_layout Subsection
37704 \begin_layout Standard
37705 Described in section
37706 \begin_inset space ~
37710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37712 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37719 \begin_layout Subsection
37721 \begin_inset Index idx
37724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37725 Paragraph ! Settings
37733 \begin_layout Standard
37734 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37735 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37739 \begin_layout Standard
37740 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37741 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37747 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37748 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37750 \begin_inset space ~
37758 \begin_layout Subsection
37759 Table and Rows & Columns
37762 \begin_layout Standard
37763 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37764 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37765 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37768 \begin_layout Subsection
37772 \begin_layout Standard
37773 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37774 It will dissolve this inset.
37775 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37779 \begin_layout Subsection
37783 \begin_layout Standard
37784 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37785 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37788 \begin_layout Subsection
37789 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37792 \begin_layout Standard
37793 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37795 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37796 \begin_inset space ~
37800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37802 reference "sec:Nesting"
37807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37809 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37816 \begin_layout Subsection
37819 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37822 \begin_layout Standard
37823 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37824 nts of the same type.
37826 \begin_inset space ~
37830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37832 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37836 for an explanation.
37839 \begin_layout Section
37841 \begin_inset Index idx
37844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37853 \begin_layout Standard
37854 At the bottom of the
37858 menu the opened documents are listed.
37861 \begin_layout Subsection
37862 Open/Close all Insets
37865 \begin_layout Standard
37866 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37869 \begin_layout Subsection
37870 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37873 \begin_layout Standard
37874 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37877 \begin_layout Standard
37878 Math macros are described in the
37885 \begin_layout Subsection
37889 \begin_layout Standard
37890 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37891 \begin_inset space ~
37895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37897 reference "sec:Navigating"
37902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37904 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37911 \begin_layout Subsection
37915 \begin_layout Standard
37916 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
37918 \begin_inset space ~
37922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37924 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37931 \begin_layout Subsection
37935 \begin_layout Standard
37936 Opens a window showing console messages.
37937 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
37939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37942 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
37943 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
37944 is processing the document.
37947 \begin_layout Subsection
37949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37951 name "subsec:Toolbars"
37956 \begin_inset Index idx
37959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37968 \begin_layout Standard
37969 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
37970 All toolbars and the
37973 \begin_inset space ~
37978 can be turned on and off.
37983 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
37995 \begin_inset space ~
38007 \begin_inset space ~
38012 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38016 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38023 \begin_layout Standard
38028 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38032 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38033 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38034 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38035 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38036 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38039 \begin_layout Standard
38041 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38042 \begin_inset space ~
38046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38048 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38055 \begin_layout Subsection
38059 \begin_layout Standard
38063 \begin_inset space ~
38067 \begin_inset space ~
38071 \begin_inset space ~
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38083 \begin_inset space ~
38088 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38089 's main window vertically while
38092 \begin_inset space ~
38096 \begin_inset space ~
38100 \begin_inset space ~
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38112 \begin_inset space ~
38117 will split it horizontally.
38118 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38119 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38120 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38121 three or more documents at the same time.
38122 To close a split view, use the menu
38125 \begin_inset space ~
38129 \begin_inset space ~
38137 \begin_layout Subsection
38141 \begin_layout Standard
38142 Closes a split view.
38145 \begin_layout Subsection
38149 \begin_layout Standard
38150 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38151 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38152 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38153 's main window fullscreen.
38154 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38155 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38158 \begin_layout Section
38160 \begin_inset Index idx
38163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38172 \begin_layout Subsection
38176 \begin_layout Standard
38177 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38178 \begin_inset space ~
38182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38184 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38195 \begin_layout Subsection
38197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38199 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38206 \begin_layout Standard
38207 Here you can insert the following characters:
38210 \begin_layout Description
38215 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38218 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38219 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38220 -packages you have installed.
38221 You can get a complete display by checking
38224 \begin_inset space ~
38230 \begin_inset Newline newline
38234 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38242 Not all characters will be visible in the
38246 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38247 dialog (see section
38248 \begin_inset space ~
38252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38254 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38258 ) can display every character.
38266 \begin_layout Description
38267 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38271 \begin_layout Description
38273 \begin_inset space ~
38277 \begin_inset space ~
38280 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38281 \begin_inset space ~
38285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38287 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38294 \begin_layout Description
38296 \begin_inset space ~
38299 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38302 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38303 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38309 \begin_layout Description
38311 \begin_inset space ~
38314 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38317 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38318 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38324 \begin_layout Description
38326 \begin_inset space ~
38329 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38333 \begin_layout Description
38335 \begin_inset space ~
38338 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38342 \begin_layout Description
38344 \begin_inset space ~
38347 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38353 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38359 \begin_layout Description
38361 \begin_inset space ~
38364 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38368 \begin_layout Description
38370 \begin_inset space ~
38374 \begin_inset Index idx
38377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38384 \begin_inset Index idx
38387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38388 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38393 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38394 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38396 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38402 \begin_inset Index idx
38405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38413 \begin_inset Newline newline
38416 More information about this feature can be found in the
38422 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38428 \begin_layout Description
38429 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38431 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38432 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38436 \begin_layout Subsection
38440 \begin_layout Standard
38441 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38444 \begin_layout Description
38445 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38446 \begin_inset script superscript
38448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38457 \begin_layout Description
38458 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38459 \begin_inset script subscript
38461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38470 \begin_layout Description
38472 \begin_inset space ~
38475 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38476 \begin_inset space ~
38480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38482 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38489 \begin_layout Description
38491 \begin_inset space ~
38494 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38495 \begin_inset space ~
38499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38501 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38508 \begin_layout Description
38510 \begin_inset space ~
38513 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38514 \begin_inset space ~
38518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38520 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38527 \begin_layout Description
38529 \begin_inset space ~
38532 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38538 \begin_inset space \space{}
38541 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38542 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38551 To insert a fraction use the command
38556 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38560 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38569 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38576 \begin_layout Description
38578 \begin_inset space ~
38581 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38582 \begin_inset space ~
38586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38588 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38595 \begin_layout Description
38597 \begin_inset space ~
38600 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38601 \begin_inset space ~
38605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38607 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38614 \begin_layout Description
38616 \begin_inset space ~
38619 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38620 \begin_inset space ~
38624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38626 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38633 \begin_layout Description
38634 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38635 \begin_inset space ~
38639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38641 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38648 \begin_layout Description
38650 \begin_inset space ~
38653 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38654 \begin_inset space ~
38658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38660 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38667 \begin_layout Description
38669 \begin_inset space ~
38672 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38673 \begin_inset space ~
38677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38679 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38686 \begin_layout Description
38688 \begin_inset space ~
38692 \begin_inset space ~
38695 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38696 \begin_inset space ~
38700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38702 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38709 \begin_layout Description
38711 \begin_inset space ~
38714 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38715 as described in section
38716 \begin_inset space ~
38720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38722 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38729 \begin_layout Description
38731 \begin_inset space ~
38734 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38735 \begin_inset space ~
38739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38741 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38748 \begin_layout Description
38750 \begin_inset space ~
38753 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38754 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38756 \begin_inset space ~
38760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38762 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38769 \begin_layout Description
38771 \begin_inset space ~
38774 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38775 \begin_inset space ~
38779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38781 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38788 \begin_layout Description
38790 \begin_inset space ~
38794 \begin_inset space ~
38797 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38798 \begin_inset space ~
38802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38804 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38811 \begin_layout Subsection
38815 \begin_layout Standard
38816 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38820 \begin_inset space ~
38841 are described in section
38842 \begin_inset space ~
38846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38848 reference "sec:toc"
38857 is described in section
38858 \begin_inset space ~
38862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38864 reference "sec:Index"
38872 is described in section
38873 \begin_inset space ~
38877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38879 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38885 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38888 is described in section
38889 \begin_inset space ~
38893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38895 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
38902 \begin_layout Subsection
38906 \begin_layout Standard
38907 To insert floats, as described in section
38908 \begin_inset space ~
38912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38914 reference "sec:Floats"
38918 and in detail the chapter
38925 \begin_inset space ~
38933 \begin_layout Subsection
38937 \begin_layout Standard
38938 To insert notes, described in section
38939 \begin_inset space ~
38943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38945 reference "sec:Notes"
38952 \begin_layout Subsection
38956 \begin_layout Standard
38957 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
38959 Branches are described in section
38960 \begin_inset space ~
38964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38966 reference "sec:Branches"
38973 \begin_layout Subsection
38977 \begin_layout Standard
38978 Inserts document class-specific insets.
38979 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
38981 An example is the document class
38982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38989 with three custom insets.
38992 Flex insets and InsetLayout
38996 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39002 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39005 \begin_layout Subsection
39007 \begin_inset Index idx
39010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39019 \begin_layout Standard
39020 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39022 For more information see chapter
39024 External Document Parts
39027 \begin_inset space ~
39033 \begin_layout Subsection
39035 \begin_inset Index idx
39038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39047 \begin_layout Standard
39048 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39049 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39056 \begin_inset space ~
39064 \begin_layout Subsection
39068 \begin_layout Standard
39073 dialog as described in section
39074 \begin_inset space ~
39078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39080 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39087 \begin_layout Subsection
39091 \begin_layout Standard
39096 as described in section
39097 \begin_inset space ~
39101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39103 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39110 \begin_layout Subsection
39114 \begin_layout Standard
39119 as described in section
39120 \begin_inset space ~
39124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39126 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39133 \begin_layout Subsection
39135 \begin_inset Index idx
39138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39145 \begin_inset Index idx
39148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39149 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39157 \begin_layout Standard
39158 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39159 Floats are described in section
39160 \begin_inset space ~
39164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39166 reference "sec:Floats"
39170 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39172 Multi-page Captions
39177 \begin_inset space ~
39185 \begin_layout Subsection
39189 \begin_layout Standard
39190 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39191 \begin_inset space ~
39195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39197 reference "sec:Index"
39204 \begin_layout Subsection
39208 \begin_layout Standard
39209 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39210 \begin_inset space ~
39214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39216 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39223 \begin_layout Subsection
39227 \begin_layout Standard
39228 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39229 Tables are described in section
39230 \begin_inset space ~
39234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39236 reference "sec:Tables"
39240 and in detail in the chapter
39247 \begin_inset space ~
39255 \begin_layout Subsection
39259 \begin_layout Standard
39265 Graphics are described in section
39266 \begin_inset space ~
39270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39272 reference "sec:Graphics"
39279 \begin_layout Subsection
39283 \begin_layout Standard
39284 Inserts a URL as described in section
39285 \begin_inset space ~
39289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39291 reference "subsec:URLs"
39298 \begin_layout Subsection
39302 \begin_layout Standard
39303 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39304 \begin_inset space ~
39308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39310 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39317 \begin_layout Subsection
39321 \begin_layout Standard
39322 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39323 \begin_inset space ~
39327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39329 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39336 \begin_layout Subsection
39340 \begin_layout Standard
39341 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39342 \begin_inset space ~
39346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39348 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39355 \begin_layout Subsection
39359 \begin_layout Standard
39360 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39361 title or caption of a float.
39362 Inserts a short title as described in section
39363 \begin_inset space ~
39367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39369 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39376 \begin_layout Subsection
39381 \begin_layout Standard
39382 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39383 Code box as described in section
39384 \begin_inset space ~
39388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39390 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39397 \begin_layout Subsection
39399 \begin_inset Index idx
39402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39411 \begin_layout Standard
39412 Inserts a program listings box.
39413 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39415 Program Code Listings
39420 \begin_inset space ~
39428 \begin_layout Subsection
39432 \begin_layout Standard
39433 Inserts the actual date.
39434 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39439 \begin_layout Subsection
39443 \begin_layout Standard
39444 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39445 \begin_inset space ~
39449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39451 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39458 \begin_layout Section
39460 \begin_inset Index idx
39463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39472 \begin_layout Standard
39473 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39474 \begin_inset space ~
39477 of the current document.
39478 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39481 \begin_layout Subsection
39485 \begin_layout Standard
39486 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39487 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39488 to jump, for example, between section
39489 \begin_inset space ~
39493 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39494 \begin_inset space ~
39497 2.5 and use the submenu
39500 \begin_inset space ~
39504 \begin_inset space ~
39511 \begin_inset space ~
39517 \begin_inset space ~
39521 \begin_inset space ~
39527 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39531 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39537 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39540 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39543 \begin_layout Standard
39544 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39548 \begin_inset space ~
39553 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39556 \begin_inset space ~
39561 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39564 \begin_layout Subsection
39565 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39568 \begin_layout Standard
39569 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39573 \begin_layout Subsection
39577 \begin_layout Standard
39578 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39579 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39580 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39584 \begin_inset space ~
39588 \begin_inset space ~
39596 \begin_layout Subsection
39600 \begin_layout Standard
39601 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39604 The \SpecialChar LyX
39605 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39607 \begin_inset space ~
39615 \begin_inset space ~
39620 manual for a detailed description.
39623 \begin_layout Section
39625 \begin_inset Index idx
39628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39637 \begin_layout Subsection
39641 \begin_layout Standard
39642 Change Tracking is described in section
39643 \begin_inset space ~
39647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39649 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39656 \begin_layout Subsection
39664 \begin_layout Standard
39665 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39666 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39667 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39669 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39670 to the clipboard or update the view.
39671 \begin_inset Newline newline
39674 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39678 \begin_layout Standard
39681 Open Containing Directory
39683 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39684 's temporary folder for the document.
39685 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39686 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39687 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39688 For example some journals require to send the
39692 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39696 \begin_layout Subsection
39697 Start Appendix Here
39700 \begin_layout Standard
39701 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39702 as described in section
39703 \begin_inset space ~
39707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39709 reference "sec:Appendices"
39716 \begin_layout Subsection
39718 \begin_inset space ~
39724 \begin_layout Standard
39725 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39726 default output format for the document (menu
39728 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39729 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39730 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39732 \begin_inset space ~
39736 \begin_inset space ~
39742 \begin_inset space ~
39746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39748 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39752 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39755 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39756 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39758 \begin_inset space ~
39761 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39763 \begin_inset space ~
39766 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39768 \begin_inset space ~
39772 \begin_inset space ~
39778 \begin_inset space ~
39782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39784 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39788 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39789 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39791 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39792 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39794 \begin_inset space ~
39797 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39799 \begin_inset space ~
39802 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39806 \begin_inset space ~
39810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39812 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39817 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39818 when it is first configured.
39819 The default output format is
39822 \begin_inset space ~
39830 \begin_layout Subsection
39831 View (Other Formats)
39834 \begin_layout Standard
39835 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39836 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39837 actual document with an external program.
39838 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39839 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39840 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39842 All possible formats are listed in section
39843 \begin_inset space ~
39847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39849 reference "subsec:Export"
39854 You should at least see the menu entry
39859 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39861 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39863 \begin_inset space ~
39867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39869 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39874 \begin_inset Index idx
39877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39878 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39887 \begin_layout Standard
39888 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
39889 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39891 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39892 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39894 \begin_inset space ~
39897 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39899 \begin_inset space ~
39902 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39906 \begin_inset space ~
39910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39912 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39917 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39918 when it is first configured.
39921 \begin_layout Subsection
39923 \begin_inset space ~
39929 \begin_layout Standard
39930 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
39931 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
39934 \begin_layout Subsection
39935 Update (Other Formats)
39938 \begin_layout Standard
39939 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
39940 your document without opening a new viewer window.
39943 \begin_layout Subsection
39944 View Master Document
39947 \begin_layout Standard
39948 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39964 \begin_inset space ~
39969 manual for more information on this topic).
39970 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
39971 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39979 \begin_inset space ~
39984 generates the output of the whole book, while
39988 will just output the chapter alone.
39991 \begin_layout Standard
39992 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
39993 in the document settings (menu
39995 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39996 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39997 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39999 \begin_inset space ~
40003 \begin_inset space ~
40009 \begin_inset space ~
40013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40015 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40019 ) or in the preferences (menu
40021 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40022 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40024 \begin_inset space ~
40027 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40029 \begin_inset space ~
40032 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40034 \begin_inset space ~
40038 \begin_inset space ~
40044 \begin_inset space ~
40048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40050 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40057 \begin_layout Subsection
40058 Update Master Document
40061 \begin_layout Standard
40062 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40078 \begin_inset space ~
40083 manual for more information on this topic).
40084 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40085 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40088 \begin_layout Standard
40089 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40090 in the document settings (menu
40092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40093 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40094 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40096 \begin_inset space ~
40100 \begin_inset space ~
40106 \begin_inset space ~
40110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40112 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40116 ) or in the preferences (menu
40118 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40119 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40121 \begin_inset space ~
40124 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40126 \begin_inset space ~
40129 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40131 \begin_inset space ~
40135 \begin_inset space ~
40141 \begin_inset space ~
40145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40147 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40154 \begin_layout Subsection
40156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40158 name "subsec:Compressed"
40165 \begin_layout Standard
40166 Un/compresses the current document.
40167 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40168 compression (see the
40170 Additional Features
40172 manual for details).
40175 \begin_layout Subsection
40179 \begin_layout Standard
40180 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40183 \begin_layout Subsection
40187 \begin_layout Standard
40188 The document settings are described in appendix
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40195 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40202 \begin_layout Section
40204 \begin_inset Index idx
40207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40216 \begin_layout Subsection
40220 \begin_layout Standard
40221 Spell checking is explained in section
40222 \begin_inset space ~
40226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40228 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40235 \begin_layout Subsection
40239 \begin_layout Standard
40240 The thesaurus is described in section
40241 \begin_inset space ~
40245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40247 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40254 \begin_layout Subsection
40256 \begin_inset Index idx
40259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40266 \begin_inset Index idx
40269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40278 \begin_layout Standard
40279 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40280 the highlighted document part.
40283 \begin_layout Subsection
40289 \begin_inset Index idx
40292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40293 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40302 \begin_layout Standard
40303 Generates with the help of the program
40305 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40308 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40309 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40310 This feature is not available on Windows.
40313 \begin_layout Subsection
40319 \begin_inset Index idx
40322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40332 \begin_layout Standard
40333 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40338 \begin_inset space ~
40343 to see the full filename paths.
40346 \begin_layout Subsection
40348 \begin_inset Index idx
40351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40360 \begin_layout Standard
40361 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40362 files as described in section
40363 \begin_inset space ~
40367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40369 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40376 \begin_layout Subsection
40378 \begin_inset Index idx
40381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40394 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40412 \begin_inset Index idx
40415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40416 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40425 \begin_layout Standard
40426 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40427 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40428 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40429 -packages and programs it needs; see
40431 \begin_inset space ~
40435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40437 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40444 \begin_layout Subsection
40448 \begin_layout Standard
40453 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40454 \begin_inset space ~
40458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40460 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40467 \begin_layout Section
40469 \begin_inset Index idx
40472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40481 \begin_layout Standard
40482 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40483 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40485 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40489 \begin_layout Standard
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40498 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40499 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40500 packages and classes found
40501 by \SpecialChar LyX
40503 \begin_inset space ~
40507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40509 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40516 \begin_layout Standard
40520 \begin_inset space ~
40525 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40530 \begin_layout Section
40532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40534 name "sec:Toolbars"
40541 \begin_layout Standard
40542 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40543 \begin_inset space ~
40547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40549 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40556 \begin_layout Standard
40557 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40558 This is described in the
40560 Additional Features
40565 \begin_layout Subsection
40567 \begin_inset Index idx
40570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40579 \begin_layout Standard
40580 \begin_inset Graphics
40581 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40589 \begin_layout Standard
40590 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40596 \begin_layout Standard
40597 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40614 \begin_inset Note Note
40617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40618 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40623 manual for more information.
40631 \begin_layout Standard
40632 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40638 \begin_layout Standard
40639 \begin_inset Tabular
40640 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40641 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40642 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40643 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40649 \begin_inset Graphics
40650 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40664 pull-down box for the environments
40677 \begin_layout Standard
40678 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40684 \begin_layout Standard
40686 \begin_inset Tabular
40687 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40688 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40689 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40690 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40691 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40721 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40744 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40751 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40774 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40781 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40790 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40804 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40820 arg "spelling-continuously"
40828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40832 Spellcheck continuously
40838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40861 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40868 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40891 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40921 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40928 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40951 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40958 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40981 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40988 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40997 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41011 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41030 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41037 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41051 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41079 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41093 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41094 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41122 Emphasize text, function of the
41124 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41126 \begin_inset space ~
41129 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41159 Set text to noun style, function of the
41161 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41163 \begin_inset space ~
41166 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41184 arg "textstyle-apply"
41192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41196 Format text using the current settings in the
41198 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41200 \begin_inset space ~
41203 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41236 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41238 \begin_inset space ~
41247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41256 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41277 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41284 arg "tabular-insert"
41292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41305 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41314 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41326 Toggle outline window on/off,
41328 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41344 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41356 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41371 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41383 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41396 \begin_layout Subsection
41398 \begin_inset Index idx
41401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41410 \begin_layout Standard
41411 \begin_inset Graphics
41412 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41420 \begin_layout Standard
41421 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41427 \begin_layout Standard
41428 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41432 \begin_layout Standard
41433 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41439 \begin_layout Standard
41440 \begin_inset Tabular
41441 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41442 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41443 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41444 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41445 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41472 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41481 arg "layout Enumerate"
41489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41499 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41508 arg "layout Itemize"
41516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41526 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41562 arg "layout Description"
41570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41589 arg "depth-increment"
41597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41609 \begin_inset space ~
41618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41627 arg "depth-decrement"
41635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41641 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41643 \begin_inset space ~
41647 \begin_inset space ~
41656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41665 arg "float-insert figure"
41673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41680 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41687 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41696 arg "float-insert table"
41704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41711 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41718 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41741 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41757 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41778 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41787 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41801 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41833 \begin_inset space ~
41842 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41851 arg "nomencl-insert"
41859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41867 \begin_inset space ~
41876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41885 arg "footnote-insert"
41893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41899 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41906 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41915 arg "marginalnote-insert"
41923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41931 \begin_inset space ~
41940 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41964 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
41966 \begin_inset space ~
41975 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41984 arg "box-insert Frameless"
41992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41998 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42035 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42060 \begin_inset space ~
42069 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42078 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42093 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42100 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42109 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42124 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42126 \begin_inset space ~
42135 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42144 arg "dialog-show character"
42152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42158 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42160 \begin_inset space ~
42163 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42179 arg "layout-paragraph"
42187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42193 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42195 \begin_inset space ~
42204 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42213 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42227 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42241 \begin_layout Subsection
42242 View/Update Toolbar
42243 \begin_inset Index idx
42246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42247 Toolbar ! View / Update
42255 \begin_layout Standard
42256 \begin_inset Graphics
42257 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42264 \begin_layout Standard
42265 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42271 \begin_layout Standard
42272 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42276 \begin_layout Standard
42277 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42283 \begin_layout Standard
42284 \begin_inset Tabular
42285 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42286 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42287 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42288 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42289 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42312 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42319 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42328 arg "buffer-update"
42336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42342 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42358 arg "master-buffer-view"
42366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42374 \begin_inset space ~
42383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42392 arg "master-buffer-update"
42400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42406 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42408 \begin_inset space ~
42412 \begin_inset space ~
42421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42430 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42445 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42446 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42447 Synchronize with Output
42453 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42476 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42477 View (Other Formats)
42483 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42490 arg "update-others"
42498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42504 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42505 Update (Other Formats)
42518 \begin_layout Standard
42519 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42523 \begin_layout Subsection
42527 \begin_layout Standard
42528 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42529 \begin_inset space ~
42533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42535 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42539 , the table toolbar
42540 \begin_inset Index idx
42543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42552 \begin_inset space ~
42557 manual and the math macro toolbar
42558 \begin_inset Index idx
42561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42574 \begin_layout Chapter
42575 The Document Settings
42576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42578 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42583 \begin_inset Index idx
42586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42587 Document ! Settings
42595 \begin_layout Standard
42599 \begin_inset space ~
42604 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42605 is called with the menu
42607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42611 You can save your document settings as default with the
42613 Save as Document Defaults
42615 button in any dialog.
42616 This will create a template named
42620 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42621 when you create a new document without
42625 \begin_layout Standard
42630 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42631 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42634 \begin_layout Standard
42635 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42636 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42637 to find the one you are looking for.
42638 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42639 the submenus of the dialog.
42641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42645 \begin_inset space \space{}
42649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42656 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42657 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42658 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42661 \begin_layout Section
42665 \begin_layout Standard
42666 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42668 Document classes are described in section
42669 \begin_inset space ~
42673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42675 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42683 \begin_layout Standard
42687 \begin_inset space ~
42692 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42697 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42698 as a layout for a document class.
42699 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42701 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42710 \begin_layout Standard
42711 Some classes use special class options by default.
42712 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42716 and you can decide to use them or not.
42717 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42718 recommended you leave them untouched.
42723 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42724 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42729 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42731 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42737 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42738 \begin_inset Newline newline
42743 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42746 \begin_inset Newline newline
42749 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42750 distribution, see section
42755 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42757 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42770 \begin_layout Standard
42775 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42776 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42777 in the background if the child document
42778 is opened without its master.
42779 This way child documents are always compilable.
42780 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42787 \begin_inset space ~
42795 \begin_layout Standard
42796 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42807 \begin_inset Index idx
42810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42812 -packages ! prettyref
42818 \begin_inset Index idx
42821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42823 -packages ! refstyle
42828 for cross-references, see section
42829 \begin_inset space ~
42833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42835 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42842 \begin_layout Section
42846 \begin_layout Standard
42847 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42848 Please refer to the section
42851 \begin_inset space ~
42859 \begin_inset space ~
42864 manual for details.
42867 \begin_layout Section
42871 \begin_layout Standard
42872 Modules are explained in section
42873 \begin_inset space ~
42877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42879 reference "subsec:Modules"
42886 \begin_layout Section
42890 \begin_layout Standard
42892 \begin_inset space ~
42896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42898 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
42905 \begin_layout Section
42909 \begin_layout Standard
42910 The document font settings are described in section
42911 \begin_inset space ~
42915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42917 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
42924 \begin_layout Section
42928 \begin_layout Standard
42929 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
42941 \begin_inset space ~
42946 and whether it should be a
42949 \begin_inset space ~
42954 can also be specified here.
42957 \begin_layout Standard
42958 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
42959 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
42960 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
42962 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
42965 \begin_layout Standard
42968 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
42971 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
42972 justifies the text on screen.
42973 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
42977 \begin_layout Section
42981 \begin_layout Standard
42982 This dialog is described in sections
42983 \begin_inset space ~
42987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42989 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
42994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42996 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43003 \begin_layout Section
43007 \begin_layout Standard
43008 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43009 \begin_inset space ~
43013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43015 reference "subsec:Margins"
43022 \begin_layout Section
43024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43026 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43031 \begin_inset Index idx
43034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43035 Language ! Encoding
43043 \begin_layout Standard
43044 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43045 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43046 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43048 is always encoded in utf8).
43049 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43050 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43051 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43052 -command is not known for
43053 a particular character).
43056 \begin_layout Standard
43057 If you use the option
43062 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43063 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43064 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43066 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43067 exactly one encoding.
43068 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43071 \begin_layout Standard
43073 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43074 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43075 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43076 installation supports Unicode), choose
43077 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43078 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43079 is quite incomplete, so
43080 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43085 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43086 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43087 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43088 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43089 -commands is not used, because all
43090 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43091 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43092 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43093 , two new alternative engines
43094 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43096 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43098 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43101 \begin_inset space ~
43109 \begin_inset space ~
43117 \begin_inset space ~
43123 \begin_inset space ~
43127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43129 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43134 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43138 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43141 \begin_layout Standard
43145 \begin_inset space ~
43150 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43151 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43161 The possible settings are:
43164 \begin_layout Description
43165 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43167 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43168 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43172 \begin_inset space ~
43176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43178 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43185 \begin_layout Description
43186 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43187 format you will use.
43188 In many cases this will be
43193 \begin_inset Index idx
43196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43204 If the newer package
43209 \begin_inset Index idx
43212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43214 -packages ! polyglossia
43219 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43220 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43221 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43223 this package will be used instead of
43230 \begin_layout Description
43232 \begin_inset space ~
43243 would be more appropriate.
43246 \begin_layout Description
43247 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43248 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43252 (for German texts), type in
43255 \begin_inset Newline newline
43260 usepackage{ngerman}
43263 \begin_layout Description
43264 None will not use a language package.
43265 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43268 \begin_layout Standard
43269 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43272 \begin_layout Description
43274 \begin_inset space ~
43278 \begin_inset space ~
43282 \begin_inset space ~
43289 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43295 \begin_inset Index idx
43298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43300 -packages ! inputenc
43306 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43307 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43308 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43312 \begin_layout Description
43313 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43315 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43316 commands, which may result in a big
43317 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43318 -commands are needed.
43321 \begin_layout Description
43323 \begin_inset space ~
43327 \begin_inset space ~
43330 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43333 \begin_layout Description
43335 \begin_inset space ~
43339 \begin_inset space ~
43342 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43345 \begin_layout Description
43347 \begin_inset space ~
43350 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43353 \begin_layout Description
43355 \begin_inset space ~
43359 \begin_inset space ~
43362 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43363 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43366 \begin_layout Description
43368 \begin_inset space ~
43372 \begin_inset space ~
43375 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43379 \begin_layout Description
43381 \begin_inset space ~
43385 \begin_inset space ~
43388 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43389 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43392 \begin_layout Description
43394 \begin_inset space ~
43398 \begin_inset space ~
43402 \begin_inset space ~
43405 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43406 \begin_inset space ~
43412 \begin_layout Description
43414 \begin_inset space ~
43418 \begin_inset space ~
43422 \begin_inset space ~
43425 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43426 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43429 \begin_layout Description
43431 \begin_inset space ~
43435 \begin_inset space ~
43438 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43439 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43440 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43441 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43442 \begin_inset space ~
43446 \begin_inset space ~
43452 \begin_layout Description
43454 \begin_inset space ~
43458 \begin_inset space ~
43461 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43462 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43463 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43465 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43466 \begin_inset space ~
43470 \begin_inset space ~
43476 \begin_layout Description
43478 \begin_inset space ~
43482 \begin_inset space ~
43485 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43488 \begin_layout Description
43490 \begin_inset space ~
43494 \begin_inset space ~
43497 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43500 \begin_layout Description
43502 \begin_inset space ~
43506 \begin_inset space ~
43509 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43512 \begin_layout Description
43514 \begin_inset space ~
43517 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43520 \begin_layout Description
43522 \begin_inset space ~
43525 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43528 \begin_layout Description
43530 \begin_inset space ~
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43537 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43540 \begin_layout Description
43542 \begin_inset space ~
43546 \begin_inset space ~
43552 \begin_layout Description
43554 \begin_inset space ~
43558 \begin_inset space ~
43561 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43564 \begin_layout Description
43566 \begin_inset space ~
43570 \begin_inset space ~
43576 \begin_layout Description
43578 \begin_inset space ~
43582 \begin_inset space ~
43585 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43591 \begin_inset Index idx
43594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43601 , when using this, set the document language to
43606 \begin_layout Description
43608 \begin_inset space ~
43612 \begin_inset space ~
43615 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43620 , when using this, set the document language to
43623 \begin_inset space ~
43629 \begin_layout Description
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43635 \begin_inset space ~
43638 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43644 \begin_inset Index idx
43647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43649 -packages ! japanese
43654 , when using this, set the document language to
43659 \begin_layout Description
43661 \begin_inset space ~
43665 \begin_inset space ~
43668 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43673 , when using this, set the document language to
43678 \begin_layout Description
43680 \begin_inset space ~
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43687 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43692 , when using this, set the document language to
43697 \begin_layout Description
43699 \begin_inset space ~
43702 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43705 \begin_layout Description
43707 \begin_inset space ~
43711 \begin_inset space ~
43715 \begin_inset space ~
43718 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43721 \begin_layout Description
43723 \begin_inset space ~
43727 \begin_inset space ~
43731 \begin_inset space ~
43734 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43735 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43736 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43739 \begin_layout Description
43741 \begin_inset space ~
43745 \begin_inset space ~
43751 \begin_layout Description
43753 \begin_inset space ~
43757 \begin_inset space ~
43760 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43761 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43764 \begin_layout Description
43766 \begin_inset space ~
43770 \begin_inset space ~
43773 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43779 \begin_inset Index idx
43782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43789 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43792 \begin_layout Description
43794 \begin_inset space ~
43802 \begin_inset space ~
43805 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43812 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43815 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43822 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43823 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43825 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43828 \begin_layout Description
43830 \begin_inset space ~
43834 \begin_inset space ~
43837 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43843 \begin_inset Index idx
43846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43853 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43856 \begin_layout Description
43858 \begin_inset space ~
43861 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43867 \begin_inset Index idx
43870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43872 -packages ! inputenc
43878 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43882 \begin_layout Description
43884 \begin_inset space ~
43888 \begin_inset space ~
43892 \begin_inset space ~
43895 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
43896 \begin_inset space ~
43902 \begin_layout Description
43904 \begin_inset space ~
43908 \begin_inset space ~
43912 \begin_inset space ~
43915 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
43916 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
43917 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
43921 \begin_layout Description
43923 \begin_inset space ~
43927 \begin_inset space ~
43931 \begin_inset space ~
43934 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
43935 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
43938 \begin_layout Section
43940 \begin_inset Index idx
43943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43950 \begin_inset Index idx
43953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43960 \begin_inset Index idx
43963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43964 Color ! Shaded boxes
43970 \begin_inset Index idx
43973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43974 Color ! Greyed-out notes
43982 \begin_layout Standard
43983 Here you can alter the font color for the
43987 (default: black), for
43990 \begin_inset space ~
43995 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
43999 (default: white) and for
44002 \begin_inset space ~
44012 sets the color back to the default.
44015 \begin_layout Standard
44016 Clicking any button showing
44024 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44025 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44026 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44027 later more quickly.
44030 \begin_layout Standard
44031 Note, if you change the
44034 \begin_inset space ~
44039 font color and use the option
44042 \begin_inset space ~
44047 in the document settings under
44050 \begin_inset space ~
44055 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44056 \begin_inset space ~
44060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44062 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44069 \begin_layout Standard
44070 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44076 \begin_layout Standard
44080 \begin_inset space ~
44089 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44092 \begin_inset space ~
44095 Code after a forced page break:
44098 \begin_layout Itemize
44099 For the page color:
44100 \begin_inset Newline newline
44107 pagecolor{color name}
44110 \begin_layout Itemize
44111 For the text color:
44112 \begin_inset Newline newline
44122 \begin_layout Standard
44123 You are restricted to one of
44159 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44166 \begin_inset space ~
44172 \begin_inset Newline newline
44175 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44176 names to refer to them:
44179 \begin_layout Itemize
44185 \begin_inset Newline newline
44190 page_backgroundcolor
44193 \begin_layout Itemize
44197 \begin_inset space ~
44203 \begin_inset Newline newline
44211 \begin_layout Itemize
44215 \begin_inset space ~
44221 \begin_inset Newline newline
44229 \begin_layout Itemize
44233 \begin_inset space ~
44239 \begin_inset Newline newline
44247 \begin_layout Standard
44248 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44251 \begin_inset space ~
44259 \begin_inset space ~
44267 \begin_layout Section
44271 \begin_layout Standard
44272 Here you can adjust the
44276 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44280 as described in section
44281 \begin_inset space ~
44285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44287 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44294 \begin_layout Section
44298 \begin_layout Standard
44299 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44305 \begin_inset Index idx
44308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44310 -packages ! biblatex
44320 \begin_inset Index idx
44323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44335 \begin_inset Index idx
44338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44340 -packages ! jurabib
44346 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44349 Sectioned bibliography
44351 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44357 \begin_inset Index idx
44360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44362 -packages ! bibtopic
44368 If you use Biblatex, you can select the style files and specify further
44370 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44374 for the generation of the bibliography.
44375 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44376 \begin_inset space ~
44380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44382 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44389 \begin_layout Section
44393 \begin_layout Standard
44394 Here you can define the
44398 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44400 \begin_inset space ~
44404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44406 reference "sec:Index"
44413 \begin_layout Section
44417 \begin_layout Standard
44418 The PDF properties are explained in section
44419 \begin_inset space ~
44423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44425 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44432 \begin_layout Section
44436 \begin_layout Standard
44437 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44438 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44444 \begin_inset Index idx
44447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44449 -packages ! amsmath
44459 \begin_inset Index idx
44462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44464 -packages ! amssymb
44474 \begin_inset Index idx
44477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44489 \begin_inset Index idx
44492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44504 \begin_inset Index idx
44507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44509 -packages ! mathdots
44519 \begin_inset Index idx
44522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44524 -packages ! mathtools
44534 \begin_inset Index idx
44537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44549 \begin_inset Index idx
44552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44554 -packages ! stackrel
44564 \begin_inset Index idx
44567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44569 -packages ! stmaryrd
44579 \begin_inset Index idx
44582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44584 -packages ! undertilde
44589 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44592 \begin_layout Description
44593 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44594 -errors in formulas,
44595 ensure that you have this enabled.
44598 \begin_layout Description
44599 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44600 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44601 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44605 \begin_layout Description
44606 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44609 \begin_inset space ~
44621 \begin_layout Description
44622 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44625 \begin_inset space ~
44637 \begin_layout Description
44638 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44649 \begin_layout Description
44650 mathtools is used for the math commands
44686 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44693 \begin_layout Description
44694 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44696 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44705 \begin_layout Description
44706 stackrel is used for the math command
44723 \begin_layout Description
44724 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44727 \begin_layout Description
44728 undertilde is used for the math command
44736 Accents for one Character
44745 \begin_layout Section
44749 \begin_layout Standard
44750 The float placement options are described in the section
44753 \begin_inset space ~
44761 \begin_inset space ~
44769 \begin_layout Section
44773 \begin_layout Standard
44774 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44776 Program Code Listings
44781 \begin_inset space ~
44789 \begin_layout Section
44793 \begin_layout Standard
44794 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44802 set to be used and set the
44807 The itemize environment is described in section
44808 \begin_inset space ~
44812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44814 reference "sec:Itemize"
44821 \begin_layout Standard
44822 You can furthermore specify a
44825 \begin_inset space ~
44830 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44831 command of the desired character.
44832 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44839 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44845 \begin_inset space \space{}
44849 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44859 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44860 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44863 \begin_layout Standard
44864 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44872 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44873 -packages in the preamble (menu
44876 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44877 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44880 \begin_inset space ~
44886 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
44890 usepackage{textcomp}
44893 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
44897 usepackage{amssymb}
44907 \begin_layout Section
44911 \begin_layout Standard
44912 Branches are described in section
44913 \begin_inset space ~
44917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44919 reference "sec:Branches"
44926 \begin_layout Section
44928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44930 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
44937 \begin_layout Standard
44938 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
44941 \begin_layout Description
44943 \begin_inset space ~
44947 \begin_inset space ~
44950 Format: The format that is used when you enter
44951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44970 View Master Document
44971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44978 Update Master Document
44979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44986 menu or the toolbar.
44987 The default is set in
44989 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44990 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44992 \begin_inset space ~
44995 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44999 \begin_inset space ~
45003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45005 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45012 \begin_layout Description
45014 \begin_inset space ~
45018 \begin_inset space ~
45021 Output settings for the menu
45023 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45025 \begin_inset space ~
45031 For a detailed description see section
45033 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45038 \begin_inset space ~
45046 \begin_layout Description
45048 \begin_inset space ~
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45055 Options offers settings for the export format
45063 \begin_inset space ~
45068 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45069 \begin_inset space ~
45072 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45076 \begin_inset space ~
45081 settings are described in detail in section
45083 Math Output in XHTML
45088 \begin_inset space ~
45097 \begin_inset space ~
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45106 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45109 \begin_layout Description
45111 \begin_inset space ~
45116 Save transient properties
45118 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45119 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45120 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45124 \begin_layout Itemize
45125 the activation of change tracking
45128 \begin_layout Itemize
45129 the output of tracked changes
45132 \begin_layout Itemize
45133 the recording of the document directory path.
45136 \begin_layout Standard
45137 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45138 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45142 \begin_layout Section
45150 \begin_layout Standard
45151 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45153 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45155 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45157 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45161 \begin_layout Standard
45162 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45163 -syntax is given in section
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45170 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45177 \begin_layout Chapter
45183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45185 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45190 \begin_inset Index idx
45193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45202 \begin_layout Standard
45203 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45205 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45209 It has the following submenus.
45212 \begin_layout Section
45216 \begin_layout Subsection
45220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45221 User Interface File
45222 \begin_inset Index idx
45225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45226 Customization ! of toolbars
45232 \begin_inset Index idx
45235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45236 Customization ! of menus
45244 \begin_layout Standard
45245 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45246 interface (ui) file.
45247 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45255 \begin_layout Description
45260 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45263 \begin_layout Description
45270 the menu entries in popup context menus
45273 \begin_layout Description
45278 specifies the toolbar buttons
45281 \begin_layout Standard
45282 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45283 and edit the entries.
45286 \begin_layout Standard
45287 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45299 entries must be finished with an explicit
45324 and in the case of the
45325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45337 The syntax for the entries is:
45340 \begin_layout Standard
45341 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45370 \begin_layout Standard
45372 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45375 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45376 -functions are listed in the menu
45378 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45380 \begin_inset space ~
45388 \begin_layout Standard
45389 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45395 \begin_layout Standard
45396 For example, assuming you use the menu
45398 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45401 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45405 \begin_layout Standard
45406 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45430 \begin_layout Standard
45432 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45447 to have the sixth bookmark.
45450 \begin_layout Standard
45454 \begin_inset space ~
45459 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45460 's toolbar buttons.
45461 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45462 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45465 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45477 \begin_layout Standard
45480 Enable tool tips in main work area
45482 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45490 \begin_layout Standard
45495 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45496 should display in the menu
45498 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45500 \begin_inset space ~
45508 \begin_layout Subsection
45512 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45516 \begin_layout Standard
45519 Restore window layouts and geometries
45522 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45523 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45527 \begin_layout Standard
45530 Restore cursor positions
45532 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45536 \begin_layout Standard
45539 Load opened files from last session
45541 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45545 \begin_layout Standard
45548 Clear all session information
45550 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45551 sessions (cursor positions, names
45552 of last opened documents, etc.).
45555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45559 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45564 \begin_inset Index idx
45567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45576 \begin_layout Standard
45579 Backup original documents when saving
45581 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45582 it was saved the last time.
45583 It is stored in the
45586 \begin_inset space ~
45592 \begin_inset space ~
45596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45598 reference "sec:Paths"
45602 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45605 \begin_inset space ~
45611 The backup file has the file extension
45612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45626 \begin_layout Standard
45629 Backup documents, every
45631 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45634 \begin_layout Standard
45637 Save documents compressed by default
45639 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45640 \begin_inset space ~
45644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45646 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45651 This applies to newly created documents only.
45652 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45655 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45656 Windows & work area
45659 \begin_layout Standard
45662 Open documents in tabs
45664 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45668 \begin_layout Standard
45673 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45680 \begin_inset space ~
45684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45686 reference "sec:Paths"
45690 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45697 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45698 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45699 of \SpecialChar LyX
45701 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45702 instance is created for each file.
45705 \begin_layout Standard
45708 Single close-tab button
45710 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45720 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45721 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45722 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45726 \begin_layout Standard
45727 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45735 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45736 before the change takes effect.
45744 \begin_layout Standard
45749 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45751 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45753 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45757 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45758 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45759 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45762 \begin_layout Subsection
45764 \begin_inset Index idx
45767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45776 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45783 \begin_layout Standard
45784 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45788 \begin_layout Standard
45789 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45797 This section only deals with the fonts
45801 the \SpecialChar LyX
45803 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45806 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45807 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45818 \begin_layout Standard
45819 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45836 (depends on the system) as its
45839 \begin_inset space ~
45855 \begin_layout Standard
45856 You can change the font size with the
45863 \begin_layout Standard
45868 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45873 points have the size of 1
45874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45878 \begin_inset space ~
45882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45884 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
45889 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
45890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45894 The sizes are explained in detail in section
45895 \begin_inset space ~
45899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45901 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
45908 \begin_layout Standard
45911 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
45913 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
45914 needs to redraw the screen less often.
45915 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
45916 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
45917 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
45919 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
45920 \begin_inset space ~
45926 \begin_layout Subsection
45928 \begin_inset Index idx
45931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45932 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
45939 \begin_inset Index idx
45942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45951 \begin_layout Standard
45952 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
45953 by choosing an item in the
45954 list and selecting the
45961 \begin_layout Standard
45962 By checking the option
45966 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
45969 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
45970 \begin_inset space ~
45974 \begin_inset space ~
45979 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
45982 \begin_layout Subsection
45984 \begin_inset Index idx
45987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45996 \begin_layout Standard
45997 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46001 \begin_layout Standard
46006 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46007 This feature is described in section
46008 \begin_inset space ~
46012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46014 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46021 \begin_layout Standard
46022 Checking the option
46025 \begin_inset space ~
46029 \begin_inset space ~
46033 \begin_inset space ~
46038 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46041 \begin_layout Section
46043 \begin_inset Index idx
46046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46055 \begin_layout Subsection
46059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46063 \begin_layout Standard
46066 Cursor follows scrollbar
46068 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46072 \begin_layout Standard
46073 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46074 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46075 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46078 \begin_layout Standard
46081 Scroll below end of document
46083 is self-explanatory.
46086 \begin_layout Standard
46087 In \SpecialChar LyX
46088 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46095 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46097 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46098 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46101 \begin_layout Standard
46104 Sort environments alphabetically
46106 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46109 \begin_layout Standard
46112 Group environments by their category
46114 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46117 \begin_layout Standard
46122 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46137 \begin_layout Standard
46138 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46143 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46144 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46148 \begin_layout Subsection
46150 \begin_inset Index idx
46153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46160 \begin_inset Index idx
46163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46164 Settings ! Shortcuts
46172 \begin_layout Standard
46177 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46179 Several binding files are available, among them:
46182 \begin_layout Description
46183 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46186 \begin_layout Description
46187 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46199 \begin_layout Description
46200 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46211 \begin_layout Standard
46212 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46217 , and binding files for special languages.
46218 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46223 \begin_inset space \space{}
46227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46235 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46236 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46237 will try to use the appropriate binding
46241 \begin_layout Standard
46242 Some binding files, like
46246 , only have a limited scope.
46247 When looking at the end of the file
46251 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46254 \begin_layout Standard
46258 \begin_inset space ~
46262 \begin_inset space ~
46267 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46268 in the selected key binding file.
46271 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46275 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46280 \begin_inset Index idx
46283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46284 Key Bindings ! Editing
46292 \begin_layout Standard
46293 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46294 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46295 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46296 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46299 Show key-bindings containing
46302 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46303 Insert there for example as keyword
46304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46311 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46312 functions that contain
46313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46321 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46322 All \SpecialChar LyX
46323 functions are also listed in the file
46328 that you will find in the
46335 \begin_layout Standard
46336 For example, to add the shortcut
46344 , select the function and press the
46349 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46350 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46353 \begin_layout Standard
46354 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46355 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46357 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46358 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46360 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46365 \begin_layout Standard
46366 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46369 \begin_layout Standard
46370 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46372 The syntax of the entries is:
46375 \begin_layout Standard
46381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46400 \begin_layout Subsection
46402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46404 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46409 \begin_inset Index idx
46412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46419 \begin_inset Index idx
46422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46423 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46431 \begin_layout Standard
46432 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46433 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46434 provides keyboard maps.
46435 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46436 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46439 \begin_inset space ~
46443 \begin_inset space ~
46448 and select the keyboard map file named
46455 \begin_layout Standard
46464 keyboard map and, if you use the
46468 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46471 arg "keymap-primary"
46477 arg "keymap-secondary"
46480 respectively or toggle between them with
46483 arg "keymap-toggle"
46489 \begin_layout Standard
46490 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46498 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46507 \begin_layout Standard
46508 You can also specify the mouse
46510 Wheel scrolling speed
46513 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46517 Middle mouse button pasting
46519 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46520 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46523 \begin_layout Standard
46531 \begin_inset space ~
46535 \begin_inset space ~
46540 you can select a key for zooming.
46541 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46544 \begin_layout Subsection
46548 \begin_layout Standard
46549 Input completion is described in section
46550 \begin_inset space ~
46554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46556 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46563 \begin_layout Section
46565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46572 \begin_inset Index idx
46575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46582 \begin_inset Index idx
46585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46594 \begin_layout Standard
46595 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46596 are normally determined during
46598 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46601 \begin_layout Description
46603 \begin_inset space ~
46606 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46607 's working directory.
46608 It is the default when you
46619 \begin_inset space ~
46627 \begin_layout Description
46629 \begin_inset space ~
46632 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46634 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46636 \begin_inset space ~
46640 \begin_inset space ~
46648 \begin_layout Description
46650 \begin_inset space ~
46653 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46659 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46663 \begin_inset Newline newline
46667 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46679 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46680 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46688 \begin_layout Description
46690 \begin_inset space ~
46694 \begin_inset Index idx
46697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46703 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46704 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46705 \begin_inset space ~
46709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46711 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46719 will be used to save the backups.
46720 \begin_inset Newline newline
46723 Backup files have the ending
46724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46734 \begin_layout Description
46736 \begin_inset space ~
46739 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46740 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46742 \begin_inset Newline newline
46749 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46755 You can edit this file with the program
46764 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46765 in its preferences under
46768 \begin_inset space ~
46774 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46779 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46781 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46782 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46788 and \SpecialChar LyX
46789 need to be running the same time.
46790 \begin_inset Newline newline
46793 The pipe is also used for the
46797 feature, see section
46798 \begin_inset space ~
46802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46804 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46809 \begin_inset Newline newline
46812 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46813 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46814 \begin_inset Newline newline
46830 \begin_layout Description
46832 \begin_inset space ~
46835 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
46838 \begin_layout Description
46840 \begin_inset space ~
46843 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
46844 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
46845 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
46848 \begin_layout Description
46850 \begin_inset space ~
46853 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
46859 You only need to specify it if you are using
46863 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
46865 For \SpecialChar LyX
46870 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
46874 \begin_layout Description
46876 \begin_inset space ~
46879 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
46880 When \SpecialChar LyX
46881 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
46882 to find it on the system.
46883 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
46885 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
46887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46891 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46894 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
46895 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
46898 \begin_layout Description
46900 \begin_inset space ~
46903 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
46904 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
46905 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
46906 code or in the document
46908 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
46910 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
46911 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
46912 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
46913 scanned for the input files.
46914 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
46915 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
46917 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
46918 compilation may fail for some documents.
46921 \begin_layout Section
46925 \begin_layout Standard
46926 Here you can insert your
46935 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
46937 \begin_inset space ~
46941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46943 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46947 , to mark changes you make as yours.
46950 \begin_layout Section
46952 \begin_inset Index idx
46955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46956 Language ! Settings
46962 \begin_inset Index idx
46965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46966 Settings ! Language
46974 \begin_layout Subsection
46976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46978 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46985 \begin_layout Description
46987 \begin_inset space ~
46991 \begin_inset space ~
46994 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
46996 You can find its actual translation status here:
46997 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46999 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47007 \begin_layout Description
47009 \begin_inset space ~
47012 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47013 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47014 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47015 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47032 The most widespread language package is
47037 \begin_inset Index idx
47040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47047 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47049 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47050 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47051 come with the alternative
47057 \begin_inset Index idx
47060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47062 -packages ! polyglossia
47067 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47068 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47074 The available selections are described in section
47075 \begin_inset space ~
47079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47081 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47088 \begin_layout Description
47090 \begin_inset space ~
47093 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47094 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47095 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47096 An example is the start command
47102 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47104 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47108 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47124 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47129 \begin_layout Description
47131 \begin_inset space ~
47139 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47140 command toggles the package on and off.
47143 \begin_layout Description
47145 \begin_inset space ~
47149 \begin_inset space ~
47152 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47156 \begin_layout Description
47158 \begin_inset space ~
47162 \begin_inset space ~
47165 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47169 \begin_layout Description
47171 \begin_inset space ~
47175 \begin_inset space ~
47178 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47179 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47180 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47182 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47189 \begin_layout Description
47191 \begin_inset space ~
47194 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47196 When this option is not set, the
47199 \begin_inset space ~
47204 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47206 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47209 \begin_inset space ~
47217 \begin_layout Description
47219 \begin_inset space ~
47225 \begin_inset space ~
47231 When it is not set, the
47234 \begin_inset space ~
47239 is set to the end of the document.
47242 \begin_layout Description
47244 \begin_inset space ~
47248 \begin_inset space ~
47251 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47252 language will be underlined in blue.
47255 \begin_layout Description
47257 \begin_inset space ~
47261 \begin_inset space ~
47264 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47265 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47268 \begin_layout Description
47270 \begin_inset space ~
47273 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47274 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47275 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47276 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47279 \begin_layout Subsection
47283 \begin_layout Standard
47284 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47285 \begin_inset space ~
47289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47291 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47298 \begin_layout Section
47302 \begin_layout Subsection
47304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47306 name "subsec:General-output"
47313 \begin_layout Description
47315 \begin_inset space ~
47318 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47320 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47322 \begin_inset space ~
47328 For a detailed description see section
47330 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47335 \begin_inset space ~
47343 \begin_layout Description
47345 \begin_inset space ~
47348 Options Options for the program
47352 that is used for the export format
47357 \begin_inset space ~
47361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47363 reference "subsec:Export"
47368 Possible options are listed in the
47373 \begin_inset Newline newline
47377 \begin_inset Flex URL
47380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47382 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47392 \begin_layout Description
47394 \begin_inset space ~
47398 \begin_inset space ~
47401 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47404 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47405 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47407 \begin_inset space ~
47413 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47416 \begin_layout Description
47418 \begin_inset space ~
47422 \begin_inset Index idx
47425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47432 \begin_inset Index idx
47435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47436 Settings ! Date format
47441 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47442 \begin_inset Newline newline
47446 \begin_inset Flex URL
47449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47451 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47457 \begin_inset Newline newline
47460 For example the format
47461 \begin_inset Newline newline
47465 \begin_inset Newline newline
47468 prints the date as day/month/year.
47471 \begin_layout Description
47473 \begin_inset space ~
47477 \begin_inset space ~
47480 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47481 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47484 \begin_layout Subsection
47490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47492 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47497 \begin_inset Index idx
47500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47501 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47510 \begin_layout Description
47512 \begin_inset space ~
47520 \begin_inset space ~
47524 \begin_inset space ~
47527 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47532 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47553 are used for Cyrillic.
47554 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47567 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47569 sets up in the background.
47570 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47573 \begin_layout Description
47575 \begin_inset space ~
47579 \begin_inset space ~
47583 \begin_inset space ~
47587 \begin_inset space ~
47590 options They only have an effect when the program
47594 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47597 \begin_layout Standard
47598 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47599 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47600 manuals of the applications.
47603 \begin_layout Description
47605 \begin_inset space ~
47608 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47609 \begin_inset space ~
47613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47615 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47622 \begin_layout Description
47624 \begin_inset space ~
47627 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47628 \begin_inset space ~
47632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47634 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47641 \begin_layout Description
47643 \begin_inset space ~
47646 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47647 \begin_inset space ~
47651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47653 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47660 \begin_layout Description
47666 \begin_inset space ~
47669 command Command for the program
47671 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47674 that is described in the section
47676 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47681 Additional Features
47686 \begin_layout Standard
47687 There are additionally the following options:
47690 \begin_layout Description
47692 \begin_inset space ~
47696 \begin_inset space ~
47700 \begin_inset space ~
47704 \begin_inset space ~
47709 \begin_inset space ~
47712 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47730 to separate folders.
47731 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47733 \begin_inset Index idx
47736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47743 \begin_inset Index idx
47746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47755 \begin_layout Description
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47761 \begin_inset space ~
47765 \begin_inset space ~
47769 \begin_inset space ~
47773 \begin_inset space ~
47777 \begin_inset space ~
47780 changes Removes all manually set
47786 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47787 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47789 \begin_inset space ~
47794 dialog when changing the document class.
47797 \begin_layout Section
47799 \begin_inset space ~
47803 \begin_inset Index idx
47806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47815 \begin_layout Subsection
47817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47819 name "subsec:Converters"
47824 \begin_inset Index idx
47827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47836 \begin_layout Standard
47837 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
47838 from one format to another.
47839 You can modify converters or create new ones.
47840 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
47847 \begin_inset space ~
47852 field and press the
47857 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
47861 \begin_inset space ~
47866 drop-down list, modify the
47870 field and press the
47877 \begin_layout Standard
47880 Converter File Cache
47886 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
47888 Maximum Age (in days
47891 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
47892 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
47895 \begin_layout Standard
47896 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
47897 definition, is described in the section
47908 \begin_layout Subsection
47910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47912 name "sec:File-Formats"
47917 \begin_inset Index idx
47920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47927 \begin_inset Index idx
47930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47939 \begin_layout Standard
47940 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
47950 programs that should be used for certain formats.
47953 \begin_layout Standard
47954 You can also define the
47956 Default output format
47958 that is used when you use
47960 View, Update, View Master Document
47964 Update Master Document
47970 menu or the toolbar.
47973 \begin_layout Standard
47974 More about formats and their options is described in the section
47985 \begin_layout Standard
47986 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
47988 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
47989 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
47990 This is done by specifying a
47995 More about this is described in the section
48006 \begin_layout Chapter
48007 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48009 \begin_inset Index idx
48012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48021 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48028 \begin_layout Standard
48030 \begin_inset space ~
48034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48036 reference "tab:Units"
48040 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48041 and used in this documentation.
48044 \begin_layout Standard
48045 \begin_inset Float table
48051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48052 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48070 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48078 \begin_inset Tabular
48079 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48080 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48081 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48289 scaled point (65536
48290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48368 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48441 % of original image width
48446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48723 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48757 \begin_layout Chapter
48759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48761 name "chap:Credits"
48768 \begin_layout Standard
48769 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48770 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48773 \begin_layout Itemize
48776 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48779 \begin_layout Itemize
48785 \begin_layout Itemize
48791 \begin_layout Itemize
48797 \begin_layout Itemize
48803 \begin_layout Itemize
48809 \begin_layout Itemize
48815 \begin_layout Itemize
48821 \begin_layout Itemize
48824 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48827 \begin_layout Itemize
48833 \begin_layout Itemize
48839 \begin_layout Itemize
48845 \begin_layout Itemize
48851 \begin_layout Itemize
48857 \begin_layout Itemize
48863 \begin_layout Itemize
48869 \begin_layout Itemize
48875 \begin_layout Itemize
48876 The \SpecialChar LyX
48878 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48888 \begin_layout Standard
48889 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48892 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
48899 \begin_layout Bibliography
48900 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48901 LatexCommand bibitem
48908 The \SpecialChar LyX
48910 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48913 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
48919 \begin_inset Newline newline
48923 \begin_inset Flex URL
48926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48928 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
48936 \begin_layout Bibliography
48937 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48938 LatexCommand bibitem
48939 key "latexcompanion"
48944 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
48946 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
48947 Companion Second Edition.
48950 Addison-Wesley, 2004
48953 \begin_layout Bibliography
48954 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48955 LatexCommand bibitem
48961 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
48964 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
48968 Addison-Wesley, 2003
48971 \begin_layout Bibliography
48972 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48973 LatexCommand bibitem
48982 : A Document Preparation System.
48985 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
48988 \begin_layout Bibliography
48989 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48990 LatexCommand bibitem
49000 The \SpecialChar TeX
49004 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49007 \begin_layout Bibliography
49008 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49009 LatexCommand bibitem
49015 The \SpecialChar TeX
49017 \begin_inset Newline newline
49021 \begin_inset Flex URL
49024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49026 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49034 \begin_layout Bibliography
49035 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49036 LatexCommand bibitem
49042 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49044 \begin_inset Newline newline
49048 \begin_inset Flex URL
49051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49053 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49061 \begin_layout Bibliography
49062 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49063 LatexCommand bibitem
49070 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49072 name "Documentation"
49073 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49080 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49084 \begin_inset Newline newline
49088 \begin_inset Flex URL
49091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49093 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49101 \begin_layout Bibliography
49102 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49103 LatexCommand bibitem
49110 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49112 name "Documentation"
49113 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49118 how to use the program
49120 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49124 \begin_inset Newline newline
49128 \begin_inset Flex URL
49131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49133 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49141 \begin_layout Bibliography
49142 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49143 LatexCommand bibitem
49150 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49153 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49158 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49164 \begin_inset Index idx
49167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49169 -packages ! biblatex
49175 \begin_inset Newline newline
49179 \begin_inset Flex URL
49182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49184 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49192 \begin_layout Bibliography
49193 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49194 LatexCommand bibitem
49201 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49203 name "Documentation"
49204 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49214 \begin_inset Newline newline
49218 \begin_inset Flex URL
49221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49223 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49231 \begin_layout Bibliography
49232 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49233 LatexCommand bibitem
49234 key "makeindex-man"
49240 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49243 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49253 \begin_inset Newline newline
49257 \begin_inset Flex URL
49260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49262 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49270 \begin_layout Bibliography
49271 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49272 LatexCommand bibitem
49279 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49281 name "Documentation"
49282 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49292 \begin_inset Newline newline
49296 \begin_inset Flex URL
49299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49301 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49309 \begin_layout Bibliography
49310 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49311 LatexCommand bibitem
49318 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49320 name "Documentation"
49321 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49326 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49328 \begin_inset Newline newline
49332 \begin_inset Flex URL
49335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49337 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49345 \begin_layout Bibliography
49346 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49347 LatexCommand bibitem
49354 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49356 name "Documentation"
49357 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49362 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49368 \begin_inset Index idx
49371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49373 -packages ! caption
49379 \begin_inset Newline newline
49383 \begin_inset Flex URL
49386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49388 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49396 \begin_layout Bibliography
49397 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49398 LatexCommand bibitem
49405 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49407 name "Documentation"
49408 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49413 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49419 \begin_inset Index idx
49422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49424 -packages ! enumitem
49430 \begin_inset Newline newline
49434 \begin_inset Flex URL
49437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49439 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49447 \begin_layout Bibliography
49448 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49449 LatexCommand bibitem
49456 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49458 name "Documentation"
49459 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49464 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49470 \begin_inset Index idx
49473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49475 -packages ! fancyhdr
49481 \begin_inset Newline newline
49485 \begin_inset Flex URL
49488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49490 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49498 \begin_layout Bibliography
49499 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49500 LatexCommand bibitem
49507 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49509 name "Documentation"
49510 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49515 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49521 \begin_inset Index idx
49524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49526 -packages ! hyperref
49532 \begin_inset Newline newline
49536 \begin_inset Flex URL
49539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49541 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49549 \begin_layout Bibliography
49550 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49551 LatexCommand bibitem
49558 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49560 name "Documentation"
49561 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49566 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49572 \begin_inset Index idx
49575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49577 -packages ! nomencl
49583 \begin_inset Newline newline
49587 \begin_inset Flex URL
49590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49592 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49600 \begin_layout Bibliography
49601 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49602 LatexCommand bibitem
49609 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49611 name "Documentation"
49612 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49617 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49623 \begin_inset Index idx
49626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49628 -packages ! prettyref
49634 \begin_inset Newline newline
49638 \begin_inset Flex URL
49641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49643 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49651 \begin_layout Bibliography
49652 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49653 LatexCommand bibitem
49660 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49662 name "Documentation"
49663 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49668 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49674 \begin_inset Index idx
49677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49679 -packages ! refstyle
49685 \begin_inset Newline newline
49689 \begin_inset Flex URL
49692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49694 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49702 \begin_layout Bibliography
49703 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49704 LatexCommand bibitem
49711 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49714 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49719 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49721 \begin_inset Newline newline
49725 \begin_inset Flex URL
49728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49730 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49738 \begin_layout Bibliography
49739 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49740 LatexCommand bibitem
49747 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49750 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49755 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49757 \begin_inset Newline newline
49761 \begin_inset Flex URL
49764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49766 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49774 \begin_layout Bibliography
49775 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49776 LatexCommand bibitem
49783 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49786 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
49791 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49792 for Cyrillic languages:
49793 \begin_inset Newline newline
49797 \begin_inset Flex URL
49800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49802 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
49810 \begin_layout Bibliography
49811 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49812 LatexCommand bibitem
49819 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49822 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
49827 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49829 \begin_inset Newline newline
49833 \begin_inset Flex URL
49836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49838 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
49846 \begin_layout Bibliography
49847 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49848 LatexCommand bibitem
49855 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49858 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
49863 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49865 \begin_inset Newline newline
49869 \begin_inset Flex URL
49872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49874 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
49882 \begin_layout Bibliography
49883 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49884 LatexCommand bibitem
49891 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49894 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
49899 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49901 \begin_inset Newline newline
49905 \begin_inset Flex URL
49908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49910 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
49918 \begin_layout Bibliography
49919 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49920 LatexCommand bibitem
49927 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49930 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
49935 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49937 \begin_inset Newline newline
49941 \begin_inset Flex URL
49944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49946 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
49954 \begin_layout Bibliography
49955 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49956 LatexCommand bibitem
49963 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49966 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
49971 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49973 \begin_inset Newline newline
49977 \begin_inset Flex URL
49980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49982 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
49990 \begin_layout Bibliography
49991 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49992 LatexCommand bibitem
49999 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50002 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50007 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50009 \begin_inset Newline newline
50013 \begin_inset Flex URL
50016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50018 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50026 \begin_layout Bibliography
50027 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50028 LatexCommand bibitem
50035 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50038 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50043 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50045 \begin_inset Newline newline
50049 \begin_inset Flex URL
50052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50054 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50062 \begin_layout Bibliography
50063 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50064 LatexCommand bibitem
50071 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50074 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50079 about new features in
50085 \begin_inset Newline newline
50089 \begin_inset Flex URL
50092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50094 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50102 \begin_layout Standard
50103 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50137 \begin_inset Note Note
50140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50147 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50148 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50149 bibliography is the second one:
50157 \begin_layout Standard
50158 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50159 LatexCommand bibtex
50160 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50161 options "biblio/alphadin"
50168 \begin_layout Standard
50169 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50173 \begin_layout Standard
50174 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50175 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50181 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50182 LatexCommand printindex